Mantadigital: Operators Handbook

Chapter 1: <Contents
MantaDigital
Operators Handbook
HBK-4001
Software version
ZM-2144 V2.01
MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011
Issue 1 October 2011 Page 1 of 406

This equipment has been designed to comply with IMO regulations and IEC standards.
The system has been tested and type approved for compliance with the following:
Equipment IMO Regulations Standards
IEC-61174 ed3
MSC.232(82) IEC-62288 ed1
ECDIS
MSC.191(79) IEC-61162 ed3
IEC-60945 ed4
IEC-62388 ed1
MSC.192(79) IEC-62288 ed1
Radar
MSC.191(79) IEC-61162 ed3
IEC-60945 ed4
When an amendment is incorporated into this handbook, the details should be recorded
below. Any equipment modifications should also be shown.
Amendment Equipment Mod

Date inserted Initials
Number number
Copyright Statement
© Copyright Kelvin Hughes Limited 2011.

All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed,
translated or stored in any form or by any means without the written permission of Kelvin
Hughes Limited.
Technical details contained in this publication are subjected to change without notice.
Page 2 of 406
1 Contents
1 Contents ........................................................................................................................ 3
2 Safety notices and warnings .......................................................................................... 4
3 MantaDigital introduction................................................................................................ 8
4 Getting started ............................................................................................................. 16
5 Go to Run … ................................................................................................................ 28
6 A to Z: Operators instructions....................................................................................... 34
7 Alarm configuration .................................................................................................... 281
8 Backup & restore ....................................................................................................... 291
9 Chart maintenance..................................................................................................... 298
10 Optional Features .................................................................................................... 343
11 Route planning ........................................................................................................ 349
12 Simulation mode...................................................................................................... 382
13 Set-up mode............................................................................................................ 384
14 Fault Finding ........................................................................................................... 385
15 Crew based maintenance ........................................................................................ 388
16 Type approval certificates ........................................................................................ 389
17 NMEA messages..................................................................................................... 390
18 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................... 392
19 Contacting Kelvin Hughes ....................................................................................... 394
20 Index ....................................................................................................................... 401
Page 3 of 406
Chapter 2: Safety notices and warnings
2 Safety notices and warnings
2.1 Electrical warnings
WARNING: ELECTRICAL HAZARD

This equipment is not fitted with safety interlocks. Lethal voltages are
present within the unit
WARNING: MAINS VOLATGES

Mains voltages are present within systems. Power supplies to equipment
must be fully isolated before accessing any part of the system or its sub-
assemblies.
WARNING: To avoid the risk of shock, ensure the mains power to the
processor and display are switched off prior to cleaning the screen.
Caution: Mains voltages

Unless otherwise stated on labels attached to the equipment, all Kelvin
Hughes equipment is supplied with the mains voltage set for 220VAC
operation.
2.2 General warning notices
WARNING: This equipment contains material which produces toxic fumes

when burnt.
WARNING: Navigation systems and equipment supplied by Kelvin

Hughes comply with the relevant SOLAS regulations and are provided as
aids to navigation and should be used in accordance with the SOLAS
regulations.
2.3 Equipment servicing
Caution: This equipment must only be serviced by Kelvin Hughes

authorised Engineers or agents.
Unauthorised servicing invalidates the warranty status of the unit.
Page 4 of 406
2.4 Radar radiation hazards
WARNING: NON-IONISING RADIATION HAZARD
Avoid exposure to the main beam of a radar antenna.
Avoid standing closer than 2 metres from the central front face of the
antenna.
It is accepted in most countries that no significant hazard is presented by

radio frequency mean power density levels up to 10mw/cm. RF power
levels in excess of this may cause harmful effects, particularly to the eyes.
Users of cardiac pacemakers should be aware of the possibility that radio

frequency transmissions can damage some devices or cause irregularities
in their operation. Anyone using such devices should understand the risks
present before exposure.
2.5 Anti Static handling
Caution: Anti Static handling

Certain semiconductor devices used in the equipment are
liable to damage from static voltage. Observe the following
precautions when handling these devices in their un-
terminated state, or sub-units containing these devices:
Persons removing sub-units from equipment containing these

devices must be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor at the
labeled point provided on/ within the equipment.
Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low

voltage types with earthed tips and isolated from the mains
voltage by a double insulated transformer.
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static

charges.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must

be stored and transported in anti-static containers.
Fit new devices in a special handling area.
For detailed information, refer to IEC Standard IEC 61340-5-

1:1998 or other equivalent standard.
Page 5 of 406
2.6 Software licensing and virus protection
2.6.1 Approved software
Only approved software may be used on Kelvin Hughes equipment. The use of unapproved
or unlicensed software on any Kelvin Hughes equipment is strictly prohibited. The use of
such software voids the warranty status of the unit.
2.6.2 Kelvin Hughes software copyright
All Kelvin Hughes software supplied is the copyright of Kelvin Hughes Ltd, which will not
accept any responsibility for any damage or loss caused in whatever way by the use or
misuse of the software. This copyright applies to software that can be supply in various
formats including but not restricted to CD, DVD, USB memory device, email or obtained via
the agents download area.
2.6.3 Microsoft Windows© copyright
All Kelvin Hughes equipment uses genuine Microsoft Windows software which is subject to
Microsoft copyrights.
2.6.4 Virus precautions
The MantaDigital processor is a PC based system fitted with user interfaces such as
CD/ DVD drives, floppy disks and user accessible USB ports.
It should be noted that the MantaDigital processor does not have anti-virus protection
installed.
It is the full responsibility of system users to ensure that potential virus threats are not
transferred to the system via removable media.
Prior to use, all removable media used with Kelvin Hughes products
MUST be fully scanned for viruses on a PC that has up to date anti-
virus software installed.
Removable media referred to includes but is not restricted to:
 USB flash memory.

 Portable USB hard drives.
 Floppy discs.
 Any form of removable media connected to the MantaDigital system.
Kelvin Hughes cannot be held responsible for damage caused to systems by virus
infections.
WARNING: Repairs to systems found to be infected with a virus are

chargeable.
Page 6 of 406
2.7 General health & safety
2.7.1 Health and safety policies
When working on Kelvin Hughes equipment, Users, Engineers and agents are expected to
work within the health and safety guidelines as issued by their respective employers,
shipyards or vessel owners.
Copies of the Kelvin Hughes Health and Safety requirements are available upon request.
2.7.2 Risk assessment
In line with the guidelines laid down by respective employers, shipyards or vessel owners,
risk assessments of a working area must be undertaken prior to commencement of any work
and must be regularly reviewed.
2.7.3 Electrical safety
When working on any equipment, ensure all power including standby and backup power to
the equipment and any associated equipment is fully isolated.
2.7.4 Working at heights
When working at heights, the guidelines laid down by respective employers, shipyards or
vessel owners must be observed at all times.
Again in line with individual company policies, safety harnesses and personal protective
equipment must be inspected prior to every use.
Page 7 of 406
Chapter 3: MantaDigital introduction
3 MantaDigital introduction
3.1 Handbook overview
The MantaDigital operator’s handbook HBK-4001 covers all the functionality that can be
configured on the MantaDigital processor; for example radar, chart radar, ECDIS etc.
The handbook has been designed for use on a PC using a Pdf reader or tablet (e.g. iPad)
loaded with an appropriate Pdf reader application.
Each topic header shows if a function is available in a specific mode i.e. Radar or ECDIS.
Function not available in Radar modes ECDIS mode only
There are a number of methods for searching for a specific operation action or function
within the handbook:
Bookmarks
Click on any of the entries in the
bookmarks
Bookmarks can be enabled in

Adobe from: View / Navigation
panels then select bookmarks.
Find
Search for a topic or word using the
FIND function in Adobe.
If this is not open, press Ctrl + F and

enter the desired keyword in the text
box and hit enter.
Index
A comprehensive index is located at
the end of the handbook.
Go to page
To go to a specific page number,
press Shift+Ctrl+N
Page 8 of 406
3.2 System Overview
The Manta Digital series comprises of a number of display options, a single ‘common-core’
MantaDigital processor, a range of X and S band transmitters including SherpEyeTM
transceiver.
The MantaDigital software allows the processor to be used for any combination of display
modes which can be accessed from the standby screen:
An optional features page on the standby screen allows the enabling of features/ modes
using a 4-digit KHKey code. These are available from Kelvin Hughes at the time of purchase
or at any time during the life of the equipment. Full details on how to use this feature can be
found in the optional features section of the handbook.
Some ‘optional features’ are enabled by default for specific systems; for example:
An ECDIS system will have ECDIS and route planning modes enabled as standard but
additional feature such as radar interlay can be enabled by purchasing a 4-digit key code.
Similarly a radar will have single and dual radar display and simulator enabled but other
optional features such as route planning can be enabled by purchasing a 4-digit key code.
Where an optional feature is NOT enabled, the mode button is ‘greyed-out’ and the text
shown in black (see below).
HAP and ECDIS NOT enabled HAP and ECDIS enabled
Page 9 of 406
3.3 Display modes

The following display modes are available on the MantaDigital system:
3.3.1 Single radar display
3.3.2 Dual radar display
3.3.3 Chart radar
Page 10 of 406
3.3.4 Harbour & Pilotage mode (HAP)
3.3.5 ECDIS mode
3.3.6 Stationary platform

This mode can only be enabled by the installation engineer and cannot be configured by the
operator. This is used in applications such as VTS.
Page 11 of 406
3.4 Display configurations
The MantaDigital series is available with the following display configurations
3.4.1 Console display(s)
Console displays are supplied with a remote trackerball, optional keyboard or MantaDigital
Control Interface (MCI) panel.
Each display is individually connected to a bulkhead mounted MantaDigital processor.
Console display MantaDigital processor
Unit identification
The part and serial number labels are attached to the units as follows:
The serial number label is The serial number label is

located on the rear of the located on the front of the
unit and is not accessible to processor
the user.
Console display MantaDigital processor
Page 12 of 406
3.4.2 Desktop display
Desktop displays are designed to be mounted on a desktop and incorporate a widescreen

TFT display, trackerball with pencil tray, optional keyboard or MantaDigital Control Interface
(MCI) panel.
Each display is individually connected to a bulkhead mounted MantaDigital processor.
Desktop display Rotatable bracket mounted MantaDigital processor

display (requires external
trackerball, keyboard or MCI
panel)
Unit identification

located on the rear of the The serial number label is located on the front of the
display located on the rear of the processor
display
Desktop display Rotatable bracket mounted MantaDigital processor

display
Page 13 of 406
3.4.3 Pedestal display
Pedestal displays are designed to be deck mounted and incorporate a widescreen TFT
display, trackerball with pencil tray, optional keyboard or MantaDigital Control Interface
(MCI) panel.
The widescreen TFT display is internally connected to a MantaDigital processor which is

incorporated into the base of the pedestal unit.
Pedestal display
Unit identification

located on the rear of the located on the front of the
display processor which is located
below the display
Pedestal display MantaDigital processor
Page 14 of 406
3.4.4 Route planning terminal
In some applications, a bulkhead mounted MantaDigital processor is used with an external

monitor/ display as a route planning terminal.
In most applications, the processor is controlled using a standard keyboard and mouse
The serial number label is

located on the front of the
processor
MantaDigital processor used

as a route planning terminal
3.4.5 Trackerballs and keyboards
Remote trackerball
Trackerball and pencil tray Optional trackerball with

Optional trackerball with
(standard fit for desktop and MantaDigital control
pedestal displays) QWERTY keyboard
interface (MCI)
Page 15 of 406
Chapter 4: Getting started
4 Getting started
4.1 Switching ON
Ensure that the external AC mains supplies to the display and all associated equipment
are switched ON at source.
Ensure the MantaDigital processor power switch is in the ON position.

NOTE: If this switch is in the OFF position, the system cannot be started from the display.
Processor power switch
0 = OFF
I = ON
From the display control panel press the ON/ OFF button
The system will now start and the two fans mounted in the MantaDigital processor will
run.
During the boot-up/ start-up sequence, the following will appear on-screen:
After a short delay, the system will automatically start with the standby screen.
Page 16 of 406
4.2 Standby screen overview
Each section of the standby screen is briefly detailed below.
NOTE: Some functions are only available when they have been enabled in Optional Features.
If a feature is NOT enabled the graphic for the function will be greyed out (see the Optional
Features section for further details).
4.2.1 Go to Run …
Single Radar Display: Places the selected transmitter

into run and starts the single radar display screen with a
single PPI
Dual Radar Display: Places the selected transmitter into

run and starts the dual radar display screen with a
primary and secondary PPI
Harbour Approach & Pilotage (HAP): Starts the HAP /

Conning display mode.
ECDIS: Starts ECDIS mode.
Page 17 of 406
4.2.2 StandBy activities …
Chart Maintenance: Starts Chart Maintenance mode.
Route planning: Starts route planning mode which is

automatically enabled for Chart Radar and ECDIS but is
also available as a purchasable option for Radar mode.
Alarm configuration: Opens the alarm configuration

page where system alarms can be set-up.
4.2.3 Software version
The current Software Version is displayed at the top of

the screen as Software version ZM-2144 Vx.x.x where
x.x.x is the version of software loaded.
4.2.4 Radar sensor selection …
Radar Sensor Selection: Selects any transmitter(s)

connected to the system as Master or Slave
The system is set to RUN by selecting either Single

Radar display or Dual Radar Display
Page 18 of 406
4.2.5 Simulation …
Simulation: Starts the simulator mode where simulated

targets or a simulated radar recording can be replayed
allowing the operator to familiarize themselves with the
operation of the system without running the radar
transceiver.
4.2.6 Optional features …
Optional features: Allows the selection and enabling of

optional features by the use of a four digit code. Optional
features are available from Kelvin Hughes at the time of
purchase or at any time during the life of the equipment.
4.2.7 Set-up …
Set-Up mode: This area is password protected and is not

available to the system operator.
Backup / Restore: Allows the backup and restoration of

data to and from a virus free USB memory stick. Data
includes system critical information, routes, user
generated maps and screen captures.
Daylight / Dusk / Night: Changes the screen brilliance

between the preset settings of Daylight, Dusk or Night
Capture screen: Takes a Jpeg screenshot of the current

screen being displayed. This may be exported using the
Export Debug Data function from within Backup / Restore.
Page 19 of 406
4.3 Display control panel
The display control buttons located at the bottom of the display are common to all console,
desktop and pedestal mounted displays.
The function of each button is detailed below.
System Alarm Display Switch Power ON/

Screen
button Button screens OFF
brilliance
illumination
Flashes Red Changes the Increases or For systems Press to switch

when there is a backlight decrease the fitted with the display and
potential error brilliance of the backlight optional Manta processor ON/
within the display buttons illumination of digital network OFF
system and trackerball the main controller
widescreen (DNC), press to
When audio is Repeated TFT display select the video
enabled an presses output from a
increase the different This is a
audible alarm is
illumination processor software ON/
generated
from OFF to OFF control
Pressing the maximum in 14 If no DNC is and does not
system alarm steps. At the fitted, this isolate the
button silences 15th press the button has no systems from
the alarm (see backlight function the AC mains
alarms) returns back to supply
OFF
The button
remains
illuminated red
until the alarm
condition is
cleared
Page 20 of 406
4.4 Trackerball and buttons explained
The MantaDigital system is operated using a trackerball and three buttons in a similar way to
operating a desktop computer.
The three buttons on the trackerball correspond to the ‘on-screen’ functions with each button
action shown in the lower right hand side of the display.
On-screen cursor buttons
1 2 3
1 3
In this handbook, the button layout for each function will be described as follows:
Left Middle Right
Example of cursor AIS ON/ OFF AIS settings Safety-Rel Msgs

buttons showing the
control of AIS.
Opens AIS Safety
The button being Switches AIS
Opens the AIS Related
described has light targets ON or
settings dialog Messages (AIS
OFF
blue background SRM)
If a button has no function or action then the cursor button is blank as shown below:
Left Middle Right
Select Target Acquire

Example of cursor
buttons where the
Right button has no Activates the AIS
function target.AIS data
Acquires radar
will be displayed NO FUNCTION
targets only
in the target
information box.
Page 21 of 406
4.5 Virtual keyboard
Where no physical keyboard is fitted to a system, a virtual on-screen keyboard can be used
to enter text.
To activate the on-screen keyboard click in the area where a text entry is required and the
keyboard will automatically appear. For example; when creating a new user map, selecting
Rename will cause the on-screen keyboard to appear.
To enter text, place the cursor over the required character and right click to select.
Other on-screen keyboard functions are described below.
Button Button function
<< & >> Moves the cursor position within a text entry to the left or right
Clear all Clears the current text entry
Shift Lock Locks the shift key
Space bar Add a space
Backspace Deletes the previous character
Cancel Discards any entries and closes the on-screen keyboard.
Caps lock Locks the Cap key

On systems where an optional QWERTY keyboard is fitted, this locks
Num lock the numbers on the physical keyboard.
This has no function on the virtual on-screen keyboard.
Accept Accepts any entries and closes the on-screen keyboard.
Examples of on-screen keyboard
Keyboard with Shift lock OFF & Caps lock ON Keyboard with Shift lock ON & Caps lock OFF
Page 22 of 406
4.6 Adjusting parameters on-screen
4.6.1 Sliders
Some parameters are adjusted by the use of ‘sliders’.
To adjust a slider, place the cursor over the bar, press and hold the left button; the cursor
symbol will change to a hand. Drag the slider to the desired position or value.
Examples of sliders in a radar display
Tune bar adjustment using the horizontal

green slider bar
Vector length adjustment using the horizontal

green slider bar
Adjustment of data using a vertical slider.
4.6.2 Adjusting numeric values
Some functions required the adjustment of a numeric value.
This is achieved by placing cursor over the value to be adjusted. Press and hold the left
button and arrows will appear above and below the number to be adjusted.
Use the trackerball to adjust the number to the desired value.
Example of numeric value adjustment
TCPA limit being adjusted
Page 23 of 406
4.6.3 Drop down boxes
Some functions require the use of a ‘drop down’ box. These are opened by clicking
anywhere in the button. For example; clicking anywhere in the speed sensor box will
produce the drop-down box
Example of a drop-down box
Speed sensor selection

Clicking inside any part of the dotted line will
produce the drop-down box
4.6.4 Sensor selection
Where a drop down box is opened, a list of configured sensors will be shown. The colour of
the text determines if the sensor is available:
Pulse Log-Sea If the text is WHITE, then the sensor is configured for use and
is available.
Serial Log (VBW)-Sea If the text is BLACK, the sensor is configured within the
processor but a signal is not being received. This could be
because the sensor is switched OFF or has a fault.
4.6.5 Tabs
Certain menus are accessed by selecting tabs. These are selected by placing the cursor
over the tab and left clicking. The colour of a tab changes to indicate that it has been
selected.
The text label for a tab may be a different colour.
WHITE text means that the function is enabled and available
BLACK text means the function is either:

a) Enabled but not receiving a signal, e.g. depth
b) The function is an optional feature that has not been enabled, e.g. CCTV input
Example of enabled and disabled tabs:
• The Spyscope and Wind tabs have WHITE text (enabled)

• The Depth and CCTV tabs have BLACK text (disabled)
Page 24 of 406
4.6.6 Closing tabs and menus
Tabs and some menus can be closed by clicking on the red cross
X which is located at the top-right of some tabs/ menus
4.6.7 Tick boxes
Some features require a tick-box to be selected. To select a tick box, place the cursor in the
box and left click.
Tick box function ENABLED Tick box function DISABLED
4.7 MantaDigital Control Interface (MCI) panel
The optional Manta Control Interface (MCI) allows the operator quick access to common
radar functions including gain, auto-sea and rain clutter, range, EBL and VRM.
Each function is detailed in the relevant section of the handbook, i.e for use of the Gain
control on the MCI panel, see Gain control in the operators section.
NOTE: The MCI panel only operates on systems that have single radar, dual radar or chart radar
display modes enabled.
NOTE: The F1 and F2 buttons are currently not assigned and have no
function
4.7.1 MCI panel backlight brilliance
Repeated presses of the BRILL button vary the MCI panel backlight
level from OFF (1st press) to maximum in 6 steps.
On the 7th press the control reverts to OFF and the cycle starts again.
Page 25 of 406
4.8 Processor doors and buttons
The following details the location on the MantaDigital processor of the DVD drive, USB port
and the processor ON/ OFF switch
CD/ DVD drive access flap
The access flap must be unlocked and

System fans
opened to gain access to the CD/ DVD
drive.
Both fans run as soon as the
processor is switched ON.
USB socket
See section 2.6 regarding anti-virus

precautions and warnings
Processor power ON/ OFF
Switches the processor ON/ OFF.
NOTE: If the processor is switched off

via the switch on the door, the ON/ OFF
switch on the display will not function.
WARNING
This switch DOES NOT
isolate the unit from the AC
mains supply.
Service access lock
Air filter Lock for gaining access to the processor

for service and maintenance.
Did you know…?
The air filter should be NOTE
routinely checked. See It is not necessary to
section 15 for details open the processor for
normal operation
Page 26 of 406
4.9 Door locks and keys
The system is supplied with two sets of keys.
 One set of keys should be placed in a position where they can be quickly accessed for
use.
 The spare set should be carefully stored for use in the event of a loss of the first set of
keys.
The two different key types are shown below.
CD/ DVD drive access key Service access key
NOTE 1: Engineers and service agents will require access to both sets of
keys to carry out service or maintenance tasks.
NOTE 2: If the keys are lost it may be necessary to replace the locking
mechanism
Lock replacement is not covered under warranty.
4.10 Switching OFF
To switch the display and processor off, ensure the display is in the standby screen.
Press the ON/ OFF button on the display control panel ONCE, after a short delay, the
display will shut down.
WARNING:
Switching off from the display control panel does not isolate the
display or processor from the AC mains supply
Page 27 of 406
Chapter 5: Go to Run …
5 Go to Run …
Depending on the system, the
following modes can be run
from the standby screen:
 Single radar display

 Dual radar display
 Harbour and Pilotage mode
(HAP)
 ECDIS mode

The following shows how to run
each mode and return to the
Standby screen
5.1 Single radar display
On interswitched
systems, firstly
select the desired
transceiver.
From the standby

screen select
Single Radar
Display.
5.2 Dual radar display
On interswitched
systems, firstly
select the desired
transceiver
From the standby

screen select Dual
Radar Display.
In dual radar display there are a number of tabs in the upper right hand side of the screen
that are detailed on the following pages:
Page 28 of 406
PPI tab
The PPI tab displays a secondary image from the

transceiver currently selected by the main PPI.
Secondary PPI independent functionality.

The following functions can be adjusted independently of
the primary PPI:
 Screen orientation (N-UP, C-UP, H-UP)

 Relative or true motion
 Ownship/ screen offset
 Range
 Trails
 Route
 ARPA & AIS display ON or OFF
 HL suppression
 Display Gain
Secondary PPI dual functionality.

ARPA/ AIS targets: All ARPA tracked targets will be
displayed on both the primary and secondary PPI
regardless of which display initiates the tracking.
Operators can choose to switch OFF the display of ARPA

targets on the Secondary PPI using the ARPA ON/ OFF
button
Operators can choose to switch OFF the display of AIS

targets on the secondary PPI using the AIS ON/ OFF button
Cursor position: A box below the gain control gives the

range, bearing and position of the cursor within the 2nd PPI
HAP tab
If connected to an appropriate input, the HAP tab displays

information for bow thrusters, propulsion systems, rudder,
wind and depth.
NOTE: There are no operator adjustable parameters in the HAP tab.
Docking tab
If connected to an appropriate input, the Docking tab

displays information for heading, speed, wind and depth.
Page 29 of 406
Route tab
Displays information relevant to the route currently loaded.
CCTV tab
Where enabled, the CCTV tab displays video from an

external VGA video source such as a CCTV system.
NOTE: There are no operator adjustable parameters in the HAP tab
ETD mode tab
Shows the 2nd PPI in Enhanced Target Detection (ETD)

mode.
See ETD section for further details
Page 30 of 406
5.3 Harbour Approach & Pilotage (HAP)
On interswitched systems, firstly

select the desired transceiver.
From the standby screen select

Harbour Approach & Pilotage
(HAP)
HAP display with Docking tab selected HAP display with navigation tab selected
5.4 ECDIS mode
From the
standby
screen select
ECDIS
Page 31 of 406
5.5 Return to Standby
There are two methods of returning to the Standby screen.
5.5.1 Return to standby method 1 or change display mode
It is possible to change display modes without returning to the standby screen using the
Display Mode button.
This button can also be used to return to the Standby screen.
To change the display mode or return to To change the display mode or return to
the standby screen, place the cursor over the standby screen, place the cursor
the Display Mode button in the lower right- over the Display Mode button in the
hand side of the display. lower right-hand side of the display
The cursor tooltip will change to show the following options:
Left Middle Right
Change Capture
Display Mode Screen
Takes a
Opens
screen shot
Select No
(see
Display Function
Capture
Mode
screen)
Click to change to Single radar Display
Click change to Dual radar Display
Click to change to HAP mode
Click to change to ECDIS mode
Click to return to the Standby Screen
Page 32 of 406
5.5.2 Return to Standby method 2
To return to the standby screen place the To return to the standby screen, select
cursor over the currently selected the Radar Control button and place the
transceiver which is shown at the top left cursor over the currently selected
side of the PPI: transceiver.
The cursor tooltip will change to show the following options:
Left Middle Right
Go to
Select Radar
Standby
Sensor
Opens the
Returns to
radar sensor
the Standby No Function
selection
screen
panel
Page 33 of 406
Chapter 6: A to Z: Operators instructions
6 A to Z: Operators instructions
This chapter covers the operation of the MantaDigital radar, chart radar and ECDIS.
The following sections are laid out in A to Z format so for example, instructions on position
sensor selection can be found in the position sensor section.
The handbook has been designed for use on a PC using Pdf reader or tablet loaded with an
appropriate PDF reader application.
There are a number of methods for searching for a specific operation or function within the
handbook:
Bookmarks
Click on any of the entries in the
bookmarks
Bookmarks can be enabled in

Adobe from: View / Navigation
panels then select bookmarks.
Find
Search for a topic or word using the
FIND function in Adobe.
If this is not open, press Ctrl + F and

enter the desired keyword in the text
box and hit enter.
Index
A comprehensive index is located at
the end of the handbook.
Go to page
To go to a specific page number,
press Shift+Ctrl+N
Page 34 of 406
6.1 AIS
AIS control in Select the Target Data icon.

single and dual radar displays
6.1.1 AIS: Switching On and OFF
With the cursor placed over the AIS ON/ OFF button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
AIS Safety-Rel.
AIS ON/OFF
SETTINGS Msgs
Opens AIS
Switches Opens the Safety
AIS targets AIS settings Related
ON or OFF dialog Messages
(AIS SRM)
• Did you know…?

NOTE: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS Selecting an AIS target
feature is switched OFF. When the AIS is switched on again, symbols automatically switches ON
are immediately shown. the AIS menu functions
AIS: ON / OFF button is blacked out
If the text for the AIS ON/ OFF and Tgt Assoc. (target
association) button is black and the AIS cannot be switch ON, an
AIS signal is not being received by the processor.
Check that the AIS is switched on and working without alarms or

a fault condition.
Page 35 of 406
6.1.2 AIS target symbols
AIS symbol Description Normal view Lost signal

A target symbol indicating the
presence and orientation of a vessel
equipped with AIS in a certain
Sleeping target
location. No additional information is
presented until activated thus
avoiding information overload.
A symbol representing the automatic
or manual activation of a sleeping
target for the display of additional
graphically presented information
Activated target including a vector (speed and course
over ground), heading and a ROT or
direction of turn indication (if
available) to display actually initiated
course changes.
A symbol representing the manual
selection of any AIS target for the
display of detailed information in a
Selected target separate data display area. In this
area, received target data as well as
the calculated CPA and TCPA values
will be shown.
A symbol representing an AIS target
Dangerous activated or not) which data
targets contravene pre-set CPA and/or TCPA
limits.
AIS targets have a broken or dashed
out line when:
 Some data is missing from the AIS

AIS with a broken
signal and CPA / TCPA
(dotted) outline
calculations cannot be made or
will be inaccurate.
 The UTC time is NOT from an
IEC61162 ZDA time source.
Page 36 of 406
6.1.3 AIS: Settings menu
With the cursor placed over the AIS ON/ OFF button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
AIS Safety-Rel.
AIS ON/OFF SETTINGS Msgs
Opens AIS
Switches AIS Opens the Safety
targets ON or AIS settings Related
OFF dialog Messages
(AIS SRM)
Selecting AIS settings opens the AIS Display settings menu.
Each feature or setting is detailed below.
AIS: Selecting the AIS display level
The level of AIS target data can be selected or deselected from the AIS Display Settings
list.
Show Class A targets Generally SOLAS vessels

Show Class B targets Small leisure craft and non-SOLAS vessels
Show Aids to Navigation Display of ATONs
Show Air Search & Rescue ASARs
Show AIS base stations Display base stations
When selected, Sleeping and active AIS targets are shown.
Show Sleeping targets
When deselected, only active targets are shown
Show ownship’s AIS Shows an AIS symbol at ownship’s position.
Show AIS target labels Labels AIS targets
When Show ownship’s AIS is selected, ownship’s AIS data
can be selected and displayed in the target data panel. Place
Show Ownship’s AIS
the cursor over ownship’s AIS symbol and press the left button
information
(the cursor tooltip does not change description) and ownship’s
data will appear in the target data panel.
Switching OFF ownship’s AIS data
To switch off ownship’s data in the target data panel, deselect Show ownship’s AIS in AIS
display Settings.
NOTE: When an AIS level is deselected in AIS display settings, AIS

targets will still alarm if they violate ownship’s CPA or TCPA limits.
Page 37 of 406
AIS: Maximum number of targets
Using the slider, the Maximum displayed AIS targets

displayed on screen can be adjusted from between zero (no
targets shown) to 500.
AIS: Filters
There are four filters for the display of AIS targets as follows:
 Filter on range (default setting): AIS targets are filtered using the distance from ownship only.
The nearest targets to ownship are shown, subject to the maximum number selected for display.
 Filter on +ve TCPA: Filters AIS targets using the time to closest point of approach (TCPA)
criteria set up from the TCPA Limit button. Subject to the +ve TCPA criteria and the
maximum number of AIS targets selected for display, this shows the targets that will
approach ownship the soonest and are within the CPA limits.
 Filter on +ve TCPA within CPA Limit: Filters AIS targets using the +ve TCPA and meeting
the criteria set up from the CPA Limit button. Subject to the maximum number of AIS targets
selected for display, this shows the targets that will approach ownship at the closest point of
approach (nearest).
 Filter on CPA with +ve TCPA: Filters AIS targets using the CPA and meeting the criteria set
up from the TCPA Limit button. This shows any targets approaching ownship using these
criteria, subject to the maximum number of targets selected for display.
AIS: Auto activation of sleeping targets
With Show Sleeping targets deselected and Auto-activation

of sleeping targets selected, no sleeping AIS targets are shown
on screen until an AIS target violates the vessel’s CPA or TCPA
limits.
When an AIS target violates CPA or TCPA limits, the target automatically activates and will
show a vector and heading.
If you are in an area with numerous moored AIS targets, the targets may auto activate. This
effect can be lessened by reducing the CPA and TCPA limits but this may hinder safe and
timely acquisition of genuine targets. In area where moored vessels are present it may be
preferable to switch OFF Auto-activation of targets.
All categories of Dangerous AIS targets ATONS will be displayed even if they are filtered
out.
If Show Sleeping targets AND Auto-activation of sleeping targets are BOTH deselected
when targets violate the CPA and TCPA settings they will activate but display as red
‘sleeping targets’ (i.e. without vectors etc).
When an AIS target no longer represent a danger it will disappear from the display. If the
operator considers the target is of interest he can activate it as normal.
Page 38 of 406
6.1.4 AIS Safety Related Messages (SRM)
When a new AIS Safety Related Message (SRM) is received, the AIS control button will
change from Blue to a Magenta background.
With the cursor placed over the AIS ON/ OFF

button the following options are available
Left Middle Right
Safety-Rel.
AIS ON/OFF AIS Settings
Msgs
Opens AIS
Switches AIS Opens the Safety
targets ON or AIS settings Related
OFF dialog Messages
(AIS SRM)
With the cursor placed over an SRM the following options become available:
Left Middle Right
ACK. MSG Delete Msg.
Acknowledges
the selected
SRM. Once
Deletes the
acknowledged,
No Function selected
the background
SRM
will change
from pink to
dark blue
SRMS’s can be expanded and collapsed using the ‘+’ and ‘-‘ symbols
Did you know…?

SRM’s can be accessed even when the
AIS is switched OFF
Page 39 of 406
6.1.5 AIS: Select, deselect & sleeping targets
Selecting a sleeping AIS target
Sleeping targets are shown as green triangles on screen with no

vector or ships information available.
When the cursor is placed over an AIS target, the cursor changes
from a cross-hair to a square around the target
With the cursor over an AIS target, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
Select
Acquire
Target
Acquires a
Selects the radar target
No Function
target (See target
tracking)
Pressing Select Target activates the

targets.
Activated targets have vectors and data for a selected AIS target is shown in the target tote
panel.
Deselecting an AIS Target
With the cursor placed over the target AIS target of interest, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Deselect Sent To
Acquire
Target Sleep
Acquires a
Sends the
radar target
Deselects selected
(See ARPA target to
the target
tracking sleep
section)
Press Deselect target: The broken square box around the target is removed indicating that the target
has been de-selected. AIS data is no longer shown in the target data panel however, the target is still
active and continues to show a vector.
Page 40 of 406
Sending an AIS target to sleep
With the cursor placed over the target AIS target of interest, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Deselect Sent To
Acquire
Target Sleep
Acquires a
Sends the
radar target
Deselects selected
(See ARPA target to
the target
tracking sleep
section)
AIS data for the selected target is no longer shown and the target vectors are switched OFF.
AIS: Lost target or signal
If no data is received from an AIS target for a specified period and if the target is of interest
(i.e. is within 3.0NM or has a positive TCPA), a Lost Target message is shown in the alarm
panel and a lost target symbol is drawn at the last known position.
Caution: The time before a lost AIS alarm is generated depends on the
speed and navigational status of the AIS target in question.
Page 41 of 406
6.2 Alarms
Alarms in Single and Dual radar display Alarms in ECDIS mode
With the cursor placed over the Alarm showing in the display, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right

Expand
Ack. Alarm Alarm
List
Expands the
alarm list
Acknowledges
allowing all
the alarm
alarms to be
viewed.
6.2.1 Acknowledging an alarm
When Ack. Alarm is pressed, the following occurs:
 The current alarm being viewed is acknowledged.

 The audible alarm associated with the alarm condition is silenced.
 If no further alarm conditions are present, the alarm button ceases to flash.
A visual indication of the alarm will continue to show until the alarm condition is cleared.
Page 42 of 406
6.2.2 Expand Alarm list
When Expand Alarm List is selected, an expanded list of alarms is opened.
Where multiple alarms are active, use the scroll bar to

scroll through the alarms list.
Some alarms are grouped and can be expanded to

provide more details of the related alarms.
These alarms have a +/ - at the left hand side.
Click on + to expand the alarm list.

Click on – to collapse the list.
NOTE: The scroll facility for the Alarm list is disabled while any
unacknowledged alarms are in the list.
Groups of unacknowledged alarms

stay in their original alarm status
colours
Unacknowledged alarms in a group
A group of acknowledged warning alarms will be in grey when collapsed and white when
expanded:
An acknowledged Group of Warning alarms An acknowledged Group of Warning alarms
Not expanded and showing on a Grey Expanded and showing on a White background
background
Page 43 of 406
NOTE: Alarms are placed in groups depending on their priority.
The most recent and highest priority

unacknowledged alarm is shown in the
collapsed alarm view.
Acknowledged alarms where an alarm

condition has not been cleared are retained
and are shown in rotation. Collapsed view
When the alarm view is expanded, the

highest priority unacknowledged alarms
are shown at the top of the list.
As the alarms are acknowledged, lower

priority unacknowledged alarms are shown.
Expanded view
To close the Expanded Alarm dialogue, press the x at the top right hand corner of the box.
6.2.3 Alarm priority
There are five priorities of alarm shown in the following descending order:
(1) Distress Urgency Safety Alarms
(2) Emergency Alarms
(3) Priority Alarms
(4) Secondary Alarms
(5) Warnings (shown in orange without an audible alarm)
Page 44 of 406
6.2.4 Alarm colours
Primary, secondary and

Warning alarms
emergency alarms
Yellow text / Red background
Flashing
Un-acknowledged
Yellow text / Orange background
Red text / Yellow background
Acknowledged
Acknowledged alarms
remain in the alarms
display until the alarm
Red text / White background Orange text / White background
condition no longer exists.
The primary, secondary, emergency and warning status of alarms cannot be changed.
These are pre-assigned in the Alarm configuration page.
6.2.5 Alarm Audio
The volume level of the audible alarm cannot be adjusted. There are two volume levels:
Volume Level 1: Standard audio level

Sounds at a slightly lower volume level when an alarm condition is triggered and other
acknowledged alarms are displayed.
Volume level 2: Higher (louder) alarm level

This sounds immediately if no alarm conditions are currently present.
If an acknowledged alarm conditions exist and a new alarm condition occurs, the new alarm
sounds at volume level 1. If after 15 seconds the alarm remains unacknowledged the
volume increases to the higher volume level 2
The audio for alarms can be switched ON/ OFF in the Alarms configuration page; please
refer to chapter 7 Alarm Configuration for additional information.
Page 45 of 406
6.2.6 Alarm configuration and password
Alarms can be configured by the user.
The alarm configuration page is accessed via the systems standby screen.
The password to adjust alarms is ‘PASSWORD’; please refer to chapter 7 Alarm

Configuration for additional information on configuring alarms.
6.2.7 System Alarm
The System Alarm button on the front panel is a visual and audible
indication of a potential problem with the processor associated
with the display.
NOTE: The system alarm button is not used to silence operational

alarms such as Collision warnings, loss of position sensor etc.
If there is a problem with the processor such as a program error, the System alarm button
will flash and an audible alarm sounds.
This is NOT an indication of issues with a transceiver or interswitch attached to the system.
If the processor appears to have crashed and the system alarm button has NOT sounded,
the processor may be busy processing data.
In the event of a system alarm, press the system alarm button to silence the audio and re-
start the processor using the power switch on the front panel.
If the system, alarm continues to sound after a reset please contract Kelvin Hughes for
assistance. Contact details can be found on the front of the MantaDigital display or at the
end of this handbook.
System alarm button Power button
Page 46 of 406
6.3 Camera (night vision)
Radar modes only Function NOT AVAILABLE in ECDIS mode
In Dual radar display mode, a night

vision camera can be displayed and
controlled using the optional Camera
tab.
Note: For the Camera tab to operate the optional camera mode must be
enabled in optional features and a Kelvin Hughes approved camera
system installed and commissioned into the MantaDigital system.
Note: The Camera tab is not available in single radar display or ECDIS
modes.
The camera cannot be controlled using the CCTV tab.
6.3.1 Camera control
When the optional Kelvin Hughes approved night vision camera is connected to the
MantaDigital processor, users can control the camera using the following modes:
 Manually control using the cursor to move the camera position.

 The Camera position tracks a user defined EBL/VRM position.
 Camera tracks a user defined fixed position.
 The Image is locked to an assigned radar tracked target.
Page 47 of 406
6.3.2 Manual camera control
The controls for manually positioning the

camera left, right up and down are located at
the left hand side of the Camera tab.
The controls are activated by left clicking on

the required button.
Each button is detailed below:
Example of optional Camera tab
Pan left: Rotates the camera to the left (anticlockwise)
Pan Right: Rotates the camera to the right (clockwise).
Pan up: Tilts the camera UP.
Pan down: Tilts the camera DOWN.
Pause: Pauses the picture but does not stop camera from rotating.
Home: Resets the camera to a user defined home position (See Setup).
Note: When the manual camera controls are used, the camera tracking
mode automatically switches to Free motion.
6.3.3 Camera bearing
The true or relative bearing of the camera is shown at the bottom left-hand side of the
camera tab.
With the cursor placed over the digital indication of bearing, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
True Relative
Bearing Bearing
Shows the
Shows the
camera
camera
No Function bearing as
bearing as
RELATIVE
TRUE (T)
(R)
Page 48 of 406
6.3.4 Camera Setup
Pressing the Setup button opens the setup dialogue.
There are two tabs in the camera setup page:
Setup: Users can adjust the presentation of the camera image and set the position of
the ‘Home’ button.
Advanced: This is password protected and cannot be accessed by the user. The
advanced tab is used by the commissioning engineer to install the camera.
SETUP functions:
Set Colour: The set colour button switches the image between a greyscale and
one or more colour modes.
Additional colour palettes can be selected during commissioning.
Press the Set Colour button to cycle through the different colour
settings.
The function of the Set Colour button is dependent on the on-screen

menu settings in the Video Menu. When the Set Colour button only
allows access to two settings (white-hot / red-hot, or black-hot / red-
cold) then it is likely the Disable Colour Thermal Video menu entry has
been selected.
The USER button is configured with the Invert Video Polarity setting by
default, so it will toggle the infrared imagery from white-hot (or red-hot,
if the Colour setting is active) to black-hot.
Page 49 of 406
Invert Colour: Inverts the colours of the selected colour palette.
Indicator On/Off: Switches the on-screen brackets indicating the

centre of the camera On/ Off
Brightness: Using the cursor, the brightness of the camera image can be adjusted
from zero to 100%
Note: The brilliance control within Camera settings is NOT linked to the
control for backlight brilliance located on the front panel of the display or
the levels as set by the Day/ Dusk / Night colour palettes.
Set Home: Pressing Set Home sets the position used for the Home button.
To set the home position, place the ERLB at the desired position and
press the Set Home button in the Setup page.
Pressing ‘Home’ on the operation panel will automatically return the

camera to the designated position.
Page 50 of 406
6.3.5 Camera tracking modes
Left clicking on the Camera tracking mode opens a dropdown list of tracking options for the
camera.
Note: When manual camera controls are used the camera tracking mode
automatically switches to Free motion.
Free motion
The camera can be centered on the current cursor position within the camera image.
Place the cursor in the Camera display and click the left button. The camera will
automatically centre at the cursor position.
Camera tracking mode set to Free motion
Page 51 of 406
Locked to EBL/ VRM
An ERBL (Electronic range and bearing line) is automatically switched ON and appears on-
screen as an orange EBL / VRM.
When the EBL or VRM has been selected and repositioned, the camera will move to the
ERBL position. As the camera is moving, the ERBL is redrawn to show the cameras current
position.
The EBL sets the camera bearing, the VRM sets elevation.
As the VRM range decreases the camera moves DOWN, as the VRM range increases the
camera moves UP.
Note: Camera elevation is limited and cannot be raised above the horizon.
By selecting the junction of the EBL and the VRM, both range and bearing can be adjusted
at the same time.
See section 6.56: VRM and EBL for additional information on control and management of
the EBL, VRM and EBRL.
Camera tracking mode set to locked to EBL/ VRM
Page 52 of 406
Locked to Ground
An ERBL (Electronic range and bearing line) is automatically switched ON and appears on-
screen as an orange EBL/ VRM.
The camera is fixed to and tracks the ground position of the EBRL.
Caution: If the position of the ERBL, EBL or VRM is moved, the camera
tracking mode automatically switches to ‘Locked to ERL/VRM’ mode.
The camera no longer tracks the original ground position and will track the
current ERBL position.
See section 6.56: VRM and EBL for additional information on control of the EBL, VRM and
EBRL.
Camera tracking mode set to locked to ground
Page 53 of 406
Locked to Target 1
When selected, the camera automatically tracks the radar tracked target or AIS target
selected and displayed as Target 1 in the target data panel.
The ERBL is automatically placed on the target
The target shown in target data 2 is not tracked.
Target
Target 1
data
Target 2
data
Camera tracking mode set to locked to target 1
Page 54 of 406
6.3.6 FLIR ‘M’ series camera control unit
The MantaDigital series is configured to use the FLIR ‘M’ series camera and Joystick Control
Unit (JCU).
When installed, the FLIR system is integrated into

the MantaDigital processor and is supplied with the
Flir joystick control unit (JCU).
The JCU is provided with a separate manufacturer’s

operator handbook.
This does not form part of this handbook. A copy

can be found on the Kelvin Hughes MantaDigital
Commercial manuals CD reference HBK-5001
WARNING
Some of the user configurable functions that can be selected within
the Flir JCU can inhibit camera functionality on the MantaDigital
processor.
The quick start guide shown on the following pages is extracted the FLIR operator’s manual
Note: Kelvin Hughes is not responsible for the content of external handbooks
Page 55 of 406
Extract from FLIR operators handbook No. 432-0003-00-10/ Revision 140/ January 2011
Page 56 of 406
6.4 CCTV
CCTV tab in single radar display Select the CCTV Control icon
CCTV tab in dual display
When an appropriate VGA camera is connected and the system is enabled to accept CCTV,
the CCTV tab becomes available in single/ dual radar displays and in ECDIS mode.
If the system is NOT enabled, the text for the CCTV tab is black and the function cannot be
accessed.
NOTE: CCTV is not available as an optional feature. If CCTV is required

an engineer will be required to connect the video feed and to configure the
system to accept CCTV/ PIP (Picture in Picture)
NOTE: There are no user configurable controls or functions within the

CCTV option.
CCTV – no video in display
If the CCTV tab is available but no video is displayed, please

ensure the video feed is switched on and operating.
Page 57 of 406
6.5 Chart Scale and position
6.5.1 Scales and orientations explained
North UP (N-UP) Information is shown in the display with the North direction upward
Information is shown on the display with the direction of the
Course UP(C-UP) vessel’s course upward. The alignment of the chart does not
change as the heading changes
With a route loaded, information is shown on the display with the
Route up
current route leg in head-up. i.e. the chart moves around the route
Information is shown on the display with ownship’s heading
pointing upward. Head-up corresponds to the visual view from the
bridge in the direction of ownship’s heading. This orientation may
Head UP (H-UP)
require frequent rotations of the display contents. Changing the
ship’s course or yawing of the vessel may render this non
stabilized orientation mode unreadable
Ownship is in a fixed position on the display and the chart scrolls
Relative motion
underneath
The chart is fixed and ownship moves across the display. The
chart resets once the ship approaches the edge of the display to
True motion
give a maximum look ahead. The True motion reset box can be
configured in the Ownship Settings tab
Maximum look- Places ownship position near the edge of the chart and gives the
ahead largest display are in the direction of the ownship’s vector
The compilation scale of the most detailed data available at a

Best scale
specific geographical position
Best scale whilst in fixed mode selects the best scale for the
Best scale in fixed geographical position at the centre of the chart display area.
mode The scale will not automatically adjust if the operator selects a
different chart area to view
Best Scale whilst in Ownship mode continually selects the best
Best scale mode
scale at ownship’s current geographical position
In fixed mode, the chart does not follow ownship’s motion; areas
Fixed mode
away from ownship can be viewed.
Ownship is kept on the chart display area; the chart cannot be

Ownship
moved away from ownship.
Page 58 of 406
6.5.2 Scale button/ Zoom IN and Out
With the cursor placed over the Scale button, the following
options are available.
Left Middle Right
Select Scale Zoom IN Zoom OUT
Produces a drop down list Zoom IN to a larger scale Zoom OUT to a smaller scale
where best scale, Set scale, chart. chart.
Full route and scales between Repeated button presses Repeated button presses
1:1,000 to 1:95,000,000 can continue to zoom IN by a continue to zoom OUT by a
be selected. factor of two limited to a factor of two stopping at the
minimum scale of 1:1,000 world chart.
Best Scale: The compilation scale of the most detailed data

available at a specific geographical position
Set Scale: A left click on set scale

will present a box where a scale can
be manually entered
Click in the Enter Chart Scale box
and use the keyboard to enter the
desired scale.
Press Cancel or X to close the

dialogue box and abandon changes.
Click Accept to Set Scale
Full Route: Zooms to a level where all waypoints on a loaded

route are displayed
Select a scale: The desired range between 1: 1000 to
1:95000000 can be selected
The Scale button will indicate the scale selected.
Page 59 of 406
6.5.3 Chart scale “traffic light” Indicator
The Chart Scale button incorporates a ‘traffic light’

system.
This shows as a green, yellow or orange indication that

advises if the scale selected is best, close to best, under
or over scale.
Green indication Best Scale Mode

When there is an outer green circle on the green ‘traffic light’
symbol ( ), the chart will automatically adjust to the best
scale as defined by the selected chart data.
If the scale is manually adjusted, the outer circle is removed.
Green indication Best Scale is in use

The chart is using the best scale as defined by the chart
data, however if a better scale becomes available the
chart will not automatically adjust to this scale.
Selecting RM Best scale or TM best scale returns the
chart to Best scale mode.
Yellow indication Close to Best
The chart is within 2 scales of Best Scale
Orange indication Under or Over scale

The chart more than 2 factors over Over-Scale
Page 60 of 406
6.5.4 Set chart position
The position of the chart can be adjusted using the Set Centre function.
With the cursor placed over a position on the chart, clicking Set Centre positions the chart
on the current cursor position; the system also switches to Fixed chart mode.
The centre of the screen position will be indicated by an ‘X’ on the chart presentation area.
Centre of
screen marker
6.5.5 Drag Zoom; Manually Zooming IN
To manually zoom into the chart, place the cursor in the desired position then press and hold the right
button. The tool tip name will change from Set Centre to Drag Zoom and a magenta coloured box
can be dragged over the required chart area.
Release the button and the chart will zoom to the selected area.
NOTE: Using Drag-Zoom will change the chart motion to fixed if the zoomed area does not
contain Ownship.
Page 61 of 406
6.6 Chart Query
In radar modes, the Chart Query function is only available when Chart Radar is
Radar enabled in optional features.
Mode
In ECDIS/ Chart Radar mode, details of chart features such as marker buoys, lights etc can
be displayed.
With the cursor placed anywhere on the chart, the following cursor button options are
available:
NOTE: When the cursor is close to an AIS target, a tracked target or ownship’s
position, the 'Cursor Cue' changes from Chart query to Select Target.
Left Middle Right
Chart Query Acquire Set Centre
Press to
See AIS or
select
Tracked See
information
target Set Centre
on chosen
ECDIS mode Chart Radar mode section
feature
Chart Radar mode ONLY When Chart Query is pressed, the Chart
settings icon and Query tab are
When Chart Query is pressed, Chart Features automatically opened.
automatically opens and the information on the Information on the selected chart feature is
selected chart feature is shown. shown.
To close Chart Features and return to the
normal display, press X
The information for each chart feature field can be expanded and collapsed using the +/ - buttons.
Page 62 of 406
6.7 Chart Radar
Chart radar button in

Single and dual radar display
Function not available in ECDIS mode
The Chart Query function is only available if optional Chart Radar is enabled in
Radar optional features.
Mode
When enabled in optional features, chart radar allows electronic navigation charts to be used
in conjunction with a radar display. The chart functionailty is described in the various topic
headings of this chapter, i.e. for chart query functions see the chart query section.
Charts are maintained/ managed in the using the chart maintenece function found in the
standby screen (see section 7: Chart Maintenance).
Charts cannot be displayed on the PPI tab of dual radar display mode.
Dual radar display with chart radar, ETD and CCTV enabled.
The chart being displayed is official ENC data so the Chart radar button shows ‘Chart’.
Page 63 of 406
6.7.1 Chart radar ON/ OFF
With the cursor over the ECS/ Chart ON/ OFF button the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Chart ON/ Chart Coastlines

OFF Settings ONLY
Switches Temporarily
Open the removes chart
the chart
Chart data leaving
presentation coastlines
Settings
ON/ OFF only.
Depending on the chart in use, the name of the chart radar control button will change as
follows:
Chart ON/ OFF

When Chart is displayed, official ENC data is in use/ being displayed.
ECS ON/ OFF

When ECS is displayed, unofficial (e.g. CMap) data is in use/ being
displayed.
When Auto is selected in Chart settings / General tab / Data source, the chart radar
button will automatically change from Chart to ECS to reflect the currently selected data.
6.7.2 Chart radar: chart settings button
See Chart setting: general tab (see following page).
6.7.3 Coastlines only
When the Coastline only is pressed and held, chart data is temporarily removed leaving just
coastlines. When the button is released, full chart data returns.
Chart radar Chart radar with coastline button pressed
Page 64 of 406
6.8 Chart Settings: GENERAL Tab
Select the Chart Settings icon.

The Chart settings menu is only General tab
Radar available if Chart Radar is enabled
Mode in optional features.
With the cursor over the Chart or ECS ON/ OFF

button the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

OFF Settings ONLY
Pressed &
Opens the
hold to
Switches the Chart
remove chart
chart ON or settings
data leaving
OFF control
coastlines
panel
only.
Select the General tab
Page 65 of 406
6.8.1 Display Level
With the cursor placed over the Display Level button the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Display
Level
Opens a drop
down list of
No Function No Function
Chart display
levels
Displays the Base set of

Base chart features as defined by
(ECDIS & Chart radar)
the IMO
Displays the Standard set of
Standard chart features as defined by
(ECDIS & Chart radar)
the IMO
ALL Displays all chart features as

(ECDIS & Chart radar) defined by the IMO
Creation and saving of

Custom custom chart display
Selection levels. This is detailed
(ECDIS & Chart radar) further in the Chart
settings / Advanced tab
This level is similar to

Base but with some
Display level in Chart settings areas removed to make
The example shown is from the radar display more
a Chart Radar
Chart Radar prominent.
(Chart radar only) NOTE: the ChartRadar
display level is NOT available
in ECDIS mode. It can only
be found on radarsystems
where Chart Radar has been
enabled in optional features.
Removes all ENC data

Coastline leaving coastal outlines
(Chart radar only)
only.
The button name will change to reflect the display level selected.
Note: When enabled and subject to the data source selected, all monitoring such as
Guardzones continue to use the ENC data available regardless of the display level selected.
Page 66 of 406
6.8.2 Depth shades
With the cursor placed over the Depth Shades button the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
2 Depth 4 Depth
Shades Shades
Selects two Selects four

No Function
depth shades depth shades
2 Depth Shades 4 Depth Shades
When Two Depth Shade is selected, the chart When Four Depth Shade is selected, the chart
displays depth contours as follows: displays depth contours as follows:
Displays depths greater than Ownship Dark Displays depths less than the
White:
safety contour Blue: shallow contour setting
Displays depths less than Ownship Displays depths less than the
Blue: Light
safety contour safety contour, but greater than
Blue:
the shallow contour
Displays depths greater than the
Grey: safety contour, but less than the
deep contour
Displays depths greater than the

White:
deep contour
Shallow, safety and depth contours are set using the sliders that can be found in Chart
settings/ General tab (see following page).
Page 67 of 406
6.8.3 Shallow, Safety and Depth contours
With the cursor placed over the Contour sliders the slider can be adjusted to set the
desired value.
Shallow contour
The Shallow contour can be adjusted by from zero to 50 Meters.
Two Depth Shade: There is no differentiation between changes in depth either side of the
shallow contour, as only one shade (blue) is used.
Four Depth Shade: The shallow contour defines the depth shade boundary between zero and the
safety contour setting.
The area between zero and the shallow contour is shaded blue and the area
between the shallow contour and the safety contour setting is shaded light
blue.
NOTE: If the chart data does not contain a depth contour at the selected depth, then
the next deepest contour is used.
Safety Contour
The safety contour can be adjusted from zero to 50 Meters and is used as part of the 3-
dimensional Guardzone.
The safety contour setting should allow for the draught of the vessel, plus an additional safety margin.
The safety contour on the chart is picked out by a bold black line.
Page 68 of 406
Deep Contour
The depth contour can be adjusted from zero to 50 Meters.
The Depth Contour can be linked to the Safety Depth. Details can be found in Chart
settings/ Advanced Tab.
Two Depth Shade: There is no differentiation between changes in depth either side of the deep
contour, as only one shade (white) is used.
Four Depth Shade: The Deep Contour defines the depth shade boundary between the safety
contour setting and depths greater than the safety contour.
The area between the safety contour and the deep contour is shaded grey
and the area below the deep contour is white.
WARNING: All contour settings must be checked prior to every

voyage and/ or prior to safety checking routes.
Graphic demonstrating all four depth contours
Page 69 of 406
6.8.4 Chart Symbol styles
With the cursor placed over the Symbol Style button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
S52 S52 C-MAP

Simplified Traditional Symbols
Chart features are Chart features are Chart features are

displayed in S52 displayed in S52 displayed in C-MAP
Simplified style Traditional style symbol style
The Symbol style button name will change to reflect the style selected.
6.8.5 Chart 1 symbols

Select the Chart settings icon.
Function not available in radar modes
The various symbol styles used on the ECDIS can be viewed using the chart 1 symbols
display mode. With the cursor placed over the Chart settings icon, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
Chart Chart 1
settings symbols
Opens the
Opens the
chart
chart settings No Function
symbols
tab
screen
Pressing Chart 1 symbols opens the chart symbols display page (see next page)
Page 70 of 406
Examples of Chart 1 symbols displays
Symbol type: S52 simplified Symbol type: S52 traditional

Palette: Standard Palette: Standard
Symbol type: S52 simplified Symbol type: S52 traditional

Palette: Chart Radar Palette: Chart radar
With the cursor placed over the ECDIS symbols button, the following chart symbols can be
selected and viewed as S52 simplified/ traditional (paper) symbols in the Standard (ECDIS)
or chart radar palette:
Page 71 of 406
6.8.6 Chart query in Chart 1 symbols
Left clicking on any of the symbols in Chart 1 symbols display will open the chart query panel
and display information about the selected symbol:
To close the Chart 1 symbols display press the red cross X at the top right of the symbols
display page:
Page 72 of 406
6.8.7 Current palette
With the cursor placed over the Current palette button the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Chart Radar Standard
Charts are Charts are

displayed in displayed in
the Chart the standard
No Function
Radar S52 ECDIS
colour colour
palette palette
Chart Radar Standard S52
ECDIS ECDIS
Chart Radar Chart Radar
The button name will change to reflect the colour palette selected.
Page 73 of 406
6.8.8 Data source
With the cursor placed over the Data Source button the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Data Source
Opens a
drop down
list of
available
chart
formats
The drop-down list allows the user to select Auto

or select a specific type of chart for display.
Auto merges the data sources available so that

any gaps in coverage of official data are filled with
unofficial data.
Depending on the selection, the Data source button name will change to Auto or the chart
type selected.
CHART RADAR modes ONLY:
Depending on the chart in use, the name of the chart radar control button will change as
follows:
Chart ON/ OFF

When Chart is displayed, official ENC data is in use/ being displayed.
ECS ON/ OFF

When ECS is displayed, unofficial (e.g. CMap) data is in use/ being
displayed.
6.8.9 Units of measure
Units of measure for the chart are displayed and cannot be adjusted.
Page 74 of 406
6.8.10 Day Bright and Day Black background
With the cursor placed over the Bay Bright / Day Black Background button the following option is
available.
Left Middle Right

Toggle
daylight
palette
Switch
between
Day Bright No Function No Function
and Day
Black
Day Bright Day Black background
The button name will change to reflect the symbol style selected.
In ECDIS or chart radar modes, pressing the Daylight button in video settings or on the
standby screen also toggles between Day bright and Day Night.
Note: The Day Bright/ Day Night button is not available when Dusk or
Night display levels are selected
Caution: The Daylight/ Dusk/ Night button does not show if Day bright or
Day night is selected
See section 6.55.5 (Video settings daylight/ dusk/ night)
Page 75 of 406
6.9 Chart Settings: ADVANCED tab
Select the Chart Settings icon.

The Chart settings menu is only
Radar available if Chart Radar is enabled
Mode in optional features.
With the cursor over the Chart or ECS/ Chart ON/

OFF button the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

OFF Settings ONLY
Pressed &
Opens the
hold to
Switches the Chart
remove chart
chart ON or settings
data leaving
OFF control
coastlines Advanced tab
panel
only.
Select the Advanced tab
Page 76 of 406
6.9.1 Chart features selection
Chart features can be selected (ticked) and deselected (un-ticked) as required. Use the
scroll bar to view all available features.
A full list of chart features is shown below

NOTE: The highlighted features below cannot be deselected.
 Anchorage  New/ unknown objects

 Background areas radar  Object info
 Background areas extra  Obstructions
 Buoys and beacons  Overhead
 Chart coverage display  Overscale pattern
 Coastline  Pipes and cables
 Data quality  Scale boundary
 Depth contour  Special area other
 ENC boundary  Special area standard
 Land features other  Text- General
 Land features standard  Text – Lights
 Lights  Text – Mariner events info
 Light range  Text – Mariner notes info
 Mariners objects  Tidal data
 Miscellaneous  Traffic and routing
Predefined and custom chart feature levels can be selected and loaded using the drop down
list next to the Save/Delete button (see chart settings/ General Tab for a description of each
level)
The button name will change to reflect the select chart feature level.
Page 77 of 406
6.9.2 Save and Delete custom display levels
The Save/Delete button is used to mange custom chart display levels. With the cursor placed
over the Save/ Delete button the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Save Delete
Selection Selection
Saves the
currently
selected
Deletes the
chart
No Function selected
features as
display level
a custom
display
level.
Save a Selection Delete a Selection
Select the chart feature(s) required Select the custom chart feature to be deleted
Press the Delete Selection button and OK to confirm

Press the Save Selection button the deletion
In the Save Custom Selection as box, enter a name for
the selection and press Accept
NOTE: Some Chart features cannot be deleted.
Attempting to delete Base, Standard, All etc will result in

The saved selection now appears in the chart features the following warning noting that the selected display
selection drop down list level cannot be deleted:
The button name will change to reflect the selected chart

feature level
Page 78 of 406
6.9.3 Soundings
The Safety depth tab contains the controls for chart soundings.
With the Soundings tab selected and with the cursor placed over the Chart Sounding
button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
ON Shallow Only OFF
All chart The Chart soundings Safety Depth Chart soundings

soundings are can be adjusted and the linked to are NOT shown.
shown. the Depth contour.
NOTE: The Shallow contour, Safety

Contour and Deep contour levels
can also be adjusted in the General
tab of the Chart settings button.
NOTE 1: Soundings that are less than the safety depth are shown in bold (Black).
Soundings that are greater than the safety depth are shown in grey (see below and on
next page)
NOTE 2: Safety depth values can be set to match the safety contour value by selecting Link
safety depth and contour
Page 79 of 406
Depth switched On Depth switched On

Link safety depth and contour NOT checked Link safety depth and contour checked
Depth Shallow Only Depth Shallow Only

Link safety depth and contour NOT checked Link safety depth and contour checked
Depth OFF
Page 80 of 406
6.9.4 Link Safety Depth & Contour
When Link Safety Depth & Contour is selected, the Safety

Depth and Safety Contour are linked together.
6.9.5 Time Validity
With the Time Validity tab selected, the display of Time Varying Objects on a chart can be
controlled as follows:
When Display objects valid at date is selected, a date can

be selected and adjusted.
Place the cursor over the date and use the trackerball to roll
up & down to adjust the date field.
6.10 Chart Settings: Query tab
See section 6.6 for details on the chart query tab.
Page 81 of 406
6.11 COG and SOG
COG & SOG in Single and Dual radar display Select the Nav data icon.
The source of Course over Ground (COG) and Speed over Ground (SOG) can be selected
as follows:
Left Middle Right
Select COG/
SOG Source
Opens a
drop down
list of
available
sources of
COG & SOG
The button name will change to reflect the selected source.
With a ground stabilised speed source selected, the COG/ SOG value is taken from that
sensor. When a water speed sensor is selected, the operator can select a COG/ SOG
source using the drop down list.
Auto COG & SOG
Using Auto selects the best current COG and SOG values from the available GPS sources.
If the currently selected navigation system fails, the COG and SOG will search for a working
sensor in the sequence:
1st : Position Sensors (GPS etc,)

2nd: Any Doppler Log(s)
3rd: Radar reference (if reference targets are available)
4th: Manual
NOTE 1: If manual speed is selected, Set and Drift can be entered using the DR Position
sensor.
NOTE 2: The Geodetic Datum defaults to WGS84 at switch ON but can be changed by the
operator to the required datum. All positions entered will then be referenced to the selected
datum.
Page 82 of 406
6.12 CPA and TCPA
CPA & TCPA in Select the Target Data icon.

Single and Dual radar display
WARNING
Tracking targets in ECDIS mode using the optional radar interlay is NOT
ECDIS TYPE APPORVED. Target tracking in ECDIS mode must not be relied
MODE upon for collision avoidance.
CPA Limit adjustment
With the cursor placed over the CPA limit button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Set CPA Accept CPA

limit limit
Accepts
CPA limit
Adjust No
and closes
CPA limit Function
adjustment
slider
TCPA Limit adjustment
With the cursor placed over the CPA limit button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Set TCPA Accept

limit TCPA limit
Accepts
TCPA limit
Adjust No
and closes
TCPA limit Function
adjustment
slider
Page 83 of 406
6.13 Cursor configuration
6.13.1 Cursor descriptions and tooltips
When the cursor is placed over any function button, the button options are displayed
immediately in the bottom right hand corner of the display. After a configurable delay the
floating tooltip will appear.
Cursor placed over a button 1 to 10 second delay Floating tooltip appears
Left Middle Right
Set CPA Accept CPA

limit limit
Description Description
of button No Function of button
function function
On-screen cursor description Handbook description of button

of button
6.13.2 Cursor tooltip configuration
The cursor tooltip can be turned ON, OFF or given a ‘pop-up’ delay of between 0 to 10
seconds.
With the cursor placed over the Lower left hand cursor tool tip button, the following option
is available.
Page 84 of 406
With the cursor placed over Floating Cursor Cue, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Floating
Tooltip
ON/OFF
Enable or
Disable the
floating
tooltip
When the Floating cursor tooltip is Disabled (OFF), the Time delay (secs) box is not
available.
The ‘pop-up’ time delay can be adjusted between 0 and 10 seconds. Press and hold the left
button over the time delay value. The values will have arrows above and below, roll the
tracker ball to adjust the time delay.
Press the red cross X to close the Cursor cue configuration menu.
6.13.3 Cursor measurement units
Cursor configuration in Select the Nav Tools icon.

Place the cursor over the Cursor button (radar) or tab (ECDIS), and the cursor buttons
change to the following:
Left Middle Right
Nautical
Metric Time to CPA
Miles
Cursor and
Cursor and Cursor and
VRM range
VRM range VRM range
and bearing
and bearing and bearing
set to
set to set to
Nautical
Metric Time to CPA
miles
NOTE: Cursor position measurements are always referenced to the

CCRP (consistent Common Reference Point)
Page 85 of 406
6.14 Depth indication and display
Where connected and configured during commissioning, ownships depth can be viewed in
all enabled display modes.
NOTE: There are no user configurable options in the depth display
The depth history (time in minutes) is retained when changing modes or switching to
standby.
Select the
Docking display
icon
Then select the

Depth Tab
Select the
Depth tab
Single radar
display
Select the
Docking tab
Dual radar
display
Page 86 of 406
6.15 Display mode
Display mode in Display Mode in ECDIS mode

single and dual radar display
The Display Mode button allows you to change the operational display to any other
available/ enabled display modes without the need to go to standby. The display mode
button also gives access to the standby screen.
With the cursor placed over the Display Mode button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Change
Capture
Display
screen
Mode
Change
display
Takes a
mode or No Function
screen shot
return to
standby
A single press captures the

entire screen/ display
Once captured, the screen

shot(s) can be exported from
the Backup & Restore menu
using the Export Debug Data
on-screen button
Use the above to select the desired mode
Page 87 of 406
6.15.1 Display mode(s) ‘greyed out’
Modes that are ‘greyed out’ i.e. the graphic for the
mode is in grayscale not colour means that the
mode is not available.
Coloured icon, White text

Mode is available
Black and white icon, black text

Mode is NOT available
See Enable Optional Features for details on how

to enable content.
6.15.2 Exit Display Mode
To exit Change Display Mode without changing mode, click the X at the top of the Select
Display Mode box.
6.15.3 Loss of data when display mode is changed
When changing the Display Mode directly from one display mode to another without
returning to the standby screen (e.g. changing from single radar display to ECDIS mode),
all data is retained.
For example, if the following facilities were active in radar mode, they would continue to
display if ECDIS or dual radar display mode are selected.
 Tracked targets
 Selected AIS targets
 Route loaded
 User generated map loaded
Caution: Changing mode by returning to Standby deletes all the

data. If the user returns to the Stand-by screen data will be lost.
NOTE: Data on Active Man Overboard (MOB) symbols and Depth

history in the depth display (where enabled) is not lost when
switching to standby. Data will be lost if the display is switched OFF.
Page 88 of 406
6.16 ECDIS Icons explained
The following gives a brief overview of each of the ECDIS icons. Each function is covered in
more detail in the various sections of this handbook.
Nav Data: Ownship sensor data.
Chart Settings: Configuration of chart settings.
Route Data: Displays information on the loaded route.
Target Data: Target management, AIS and CPA/ TCPA settings.
Radar Control: When enabled, controls the optional radar interlay.
User Maps: Management and creation of user maps.
Ownship settings: Vessel predictor, past track and look ahead.
Docking Display: Displays Speed, Wind and depth.
Position fixing: Lines of position, dead reckoning and estimated position fixing.
Nav Tools: Cursor control and cursor data. Parallel index lines, VRM & EBL.
Route Data: Displays information on a loaded route.
Mariners notes/ Events: Addition and management of mariners notes and events
CCTV Control: Viewing of optional external video input.
Man Overboard: Triggers a Man overboard on screen.
Alarms: Indicates when an alarm condition exists.
Show/ Hide: Maximise and minimse the ECDIS menu panel.
Page 89 of 406
6.17 Enhanced Target Detection (ETD)
NOTE: The optional Enhanced Target Detection (ETD) mode is only

available when it has been enabled in optional features.
When ETD is NOT enabled, the button text is Black and ETD mode
cannot be selected.
6.17.1 ETD explained
Enhanced Target Detection uses an advanced processing technique to produce a composite

display consisting of three layers. The layers consist of a base layer, an overlaid fixed target
layer and a finally a moving target layer.
Base layer: This presents a historical record of approximately the last 30 seconds
of radar data. This is processed in such a way as to emphasise the
underlying structure of the surrounding sea surface and fixed targets.
Fixed target layer: This presents fixed targets such as land, buoys, slow moving and
stationary targets and is shown in a different colour to the base layer.
The layer is derived from the base layer and has a variable gain level
which is controlled using the ‘Fixed Tgt’ slider
Moving target layer: This presents fast moving and transient information and is displayed in
a different colour to the fixed target layer. This layer is derived from
the current scan and is controlled using the ‘Moving Tgt’ slider.
Base Layer
Background returns derived from the last
30 seconds of scans
Fixed Target Layer

Gain level controlled by the Fixed Tgt
slider
Moving Target Layer

Gain level controlled by the Moving Tgt
slider
Page 90 of 406
6.17.2 Benefits of ETD
 Buoys and other small fluctuating (time-varying) targets are more positively detected.
 Moving targets can be more rapidly identified.
 Improved situational awareness in the presence of sea-ice, rain and sea clutter.
ETD OFF ETD ON
Radar in heavy rain with 8 to 12M waves ETD mode enabled showing target that was
previously partially obscured by clutter
Page 91 of 406
6.17.3 Switching ETD ON in main PPI
When starting single or dual radar modes from the Standby screen, the display will always
start with the ETD switched OFF.
With the cursor placed over the ETD button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right

Enhanced Tgt
Detection
ON/OFF
Switches ETD
mode ON/ OFF
When ETD is switched ON the following changes occur:
 The Gain control is replaced with Fixed and Moving Targets controls
 Dynamic Clutter SuppressionTM is disabled
 Interference rejection, scan to scan rejection is disabled
Sea clutter, rain filter and target enhance functions operate normally
Single and dual radar display Single and dual radar display Dual radar display
ETD OFF ETD ON ETD TAB
Page 92 of 406
6.17.4 Fixed and moving target adjustment
Fixed Targets
Main PPI With the cursor placed over the Fixed Targets slider, the
amount of overall gain shown in the ETD display can be
adjusted.
Fixed targets are shown in a different colour to the base

layer
ETD tab
Moving Targets
Main PPI With the cursor placed over the Moving Targets slider, the
gain threshold for moving targets can be adjusted
Moving targets targets are shown in a different colour to

fixed targets
ETD tab
Fine adjustment (main PPI ONLY)
With the cursor placed over the numeric value for fixed and/
or moving targets, the values can be fine tuned.
Place the cursor over the value to be adjusted and arrows

will appear above and below the numbers.
Use the trackerball to adjust the value to the desired level.
Screen saturation
In Dual radar display mode, placing the moving and fixed targets to maximum can saturate
the secondary PPI in the ETD tab making it difficult to distinguish targets from noise.
The main PPI in single and dual radar display contains a feature that limits the overall
saturation resulting in less lost targets.
Page 93 of 406
6.17.5 ETD tab in Dual PPI
When dual radar display is started and

ETD is enabled in optional features, the
ETD tab will be available.
IF ETD is NOT enabled in optional

features, the ETD tab text is black and the
tab cannot be selected.
Dual display, PPI tab Dual Display, ETD tab
NOTE: Dual radar mode always starts with the PPI tab selected
See the previous section for adjustment of the fixed and moving target sliders.
Caution: When selecting or returning to the ETD tab, Head-up (H-UP)

mode is always automatically selected
Page 94 of 406
6.17.6 Fixed & moving target colours
The colour of both fixed and moving targets can be adjusted using the Video Settings
button on the main display.
This is detailed in the video settings section of this handbook.
6.17.7 Switching ETD OFF
ETD can be switched OFF in the main PPI by placing the cursor over the ETD button and
pressing Enhanced Tgt Detection ON/OFF.
 In dual radar display, the ETD cannot be switched OFF in the ETD Tab.
 When ETD is switched OFF or when changing display modes, the moving and fixed
target settings are retained.
 When the display is placed in Standby, the ETD moving and fixed target settings are
lost.
6.17.8 ETD cautions and notes
ETD Initialisation
It takes approximately 30 seconds for the ETD display to fully initialise after any of the
following:
 Initial switch on
 Change of range
 Change of pulse length
 Adjustment of sea or rain filters
During the initialisation period, the moving target presentation is not available; however real
time information from the current scan is available.
Fixed and moving target settings

If the moving and fixed targets are set to zero in dual display mode, the main PPI still
displays a trace of targets which can assist in targets being missed.
ETD trial period

Some systems are delivered with ETD enabled for a trial period. When this trial expires a
KHKey will need to be purchased (see optional features).
Racon detection
A triggered racon will be presented on the PPI in moving target colour. Racon responses will
be preserved in the base layer for many seconds after they have ceased to be triggered.
This is normal behaviour and provides enhanced detection of a racon.
Page 95 of 406
Historical artefacts/ wake

Moving targets may leave trails in the base layer (vessel wake). These should not be
confused with normal target trails however they do convey similar information and can aid
situational awareness.
After ETD initialisation, large fast moving targets may also leave historical artefacts (again
vessel wake) in the base layer which may persist for several scans. These artefacts may
have the appearance of a stationary target but will disappear once the processing has
reached steady state.
This is a normal part of the operation and the false target can be quickly associated with a
moving target.
‘Other’ vessel’s wake
Ownship wake
Page 96 of 406
6.18 eToken Software Security
The MantaDigital software and all chart licenses are protected by the means of an eToken.
This USB security device is fitted within the main processor unit.
The eToken is NOT a USB memory stick.
If the processor is started without the correct eToken fitted, a dialogue box is displayed
stating ‘eToken dongle not detected; optional features not available’.
With no eToken fitted, the system will operate but all optional features will be disabled and
some features will not be available:
ECDIS mode:
The system will appear to have no charts loaded and the ‘Chart: No ENC available’ alarm
will be displayed.
Radar Mode:
Single and dual radar display modes will still operate but optional features such as ETD will
not be available.
Where no eToken is fitted, the following will be seen in the

standby screen:
If an eToken alarm appears, reattach the correct eToken.
If the eToken warning remains, please contact Kelvin Hughes for assistance.
Caution: eTokens are unique to each processor and must not be

nd
removed and placed in a 2 processor without the prior permission of
Kelvin Hughes Ltd.
Example of an eToken used in Kelvin Hughes MantaDigital

processors.
The label attached to an eToken must NEVER be removed as it

contains the unique eToken identification number
Page 97 of 406
6.19 Guardzone
Guardzones in Single and Dual radar display Select the Target Data icon.
Guardzones are used to alert the user to targets that enter a user defined/ enabled area.
Any number of inclusion and exclusion sectors can be created and each can be individually
sized.
Guardzones in ECDIS mode

For guardzone target tracking in ECDIS mode, the optional
radar interlay must be enabled in optional features and
switched ON using the Radar Control Icon:
WARNING
Tracking targets in ECDIS mode using the optional radar interlay is
NOT TYPE APPORVED.
ECDIS
mode Target tracking in ECDIS mode must not be relied upon for
collision avoidance.
There are two types of Guardzone that can be generated on screen as follows:
Inclusion Sector (shown on screen as a Green line)
 Radar targets: Radar targets (ships, landmasses, etc) entering an enabled inclusion
zone are automatically acquired as tracked target(s). AIS targets entering an enabled
inclusion zone are automatically activated.
 Guardzones can be configured as Heading or North stabilised.
Exclusion Sector (shown in Red line):

Guardzone Exclusion sectors can be created in an area where target acquisition is not
required, for example, they can be placed over landmasses. AIS and radar returns entering
an exclusion sector will not be acquired or tracked.
Page 98 of 406
6.19.1 Creating a Guardzone
With the cursor placed over the Guardzone button, the Enable Guardzone Dialog option
becomes available.
Left Middle Right
Enable
Guardzone
Dialogue
Opens the
guardzone
creation No Function No Function
dialogue
With the cursor over the Create Inclusive sector or Create Exclusive Sector, the following
options are available:
NOTE: Inclusion and Exclusion sectors are created in the same way.
Left Middle Right
Heading North
Stabilised Stabilised
See below No Function See below
Heading Stabilised: Creates a heading stabilised guardzone that stays referenced to

ownship’s position. As the vessel turns, the guardzone follows the
vessels heading.
North Stabilised: Creates a guardzone that remains stabilised to North.
When either Heading or North stabilised is selected, a guardzone is created on the screen
3.0NM ahead of ownship and +/- 30 degrees of the heading line.
Page 99 of 406
When the cursor is positioned over the guardzone, the cursor changes from a cross hair to a
square with the following options:
Left Middle Right
Select Enable/
Acquire
Zone Disable Zone
Selects the Enables or

edge of the See target disables the
guardzone to tracking selected
be adjusted. guardzone.
Guardzone not enabled
Set
Acquire Remove Zone
Zone
Deletes the
Accepts the selected Zone
See target
adjusted position See Guardzone
tracking
of the guardzone deletion
Guardzone enabled cautions
6.19.2 Remove all Guardzones
ALL Guardzones can be removed as follows:
Left Middle Right
Remove ALL
Guardzones
Deletes all
Guardzones
See Guardzone No Function No Function
deletion
cautions
6.19.3 Guardzone Deletion cautions
Caution:
When a Guardzone is disabled or deleted, Radar and AIS targets entering

an Inclusion zone will not be acquired or activated.
Targets that were acquired prior to the zone being disabled or deleted will
continue to be tracked.
AIS targets that were activated prior to the zone being disabled or deleted
will remain active.
Page 100 of 406

6.20 HAP tab in dual display radar
Dual display Radar mode only Function NOT AVAILABLE in ECDIS mode
When Dual Radar display is selected, the HAP tab can be used to view conning
information on sensors connected to the system.
Depending on the commissioning configuration, this can include the display of the following:
 Propeller RPM and Pitch

 Bow thrusters  Wind speed (True and Relative)
 Rudder angle  Depth
 Azipod RPM and direction
With the exception of True or Relative wind, there are no user configurable functions within
the HAP tab.
NOTE: The HAP tab is only available in dual radar display mode. It is
NOT available in single radar display or ECDIS mode.
The HAP tab layout varies depending on the system commissioning. For example the
number of bow thrusters displayed can be set during commissioning:
Single Bow thruster configured Two Bow thruster configured Three bow thruster configured
HAP Sensor NOT configured
If a sensor is not connected to the processor,

the graphic is not shown and the warning
‘Sensor NOT configured’ is displayed:
Page 101 of 406

6.21 Heading sensor selection and control
Gyro in Single radar display Select the Nav data icon.
Gyro in Dual radar display
With the cursor placed over the heading sensor button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right
Select Gyro
Sensor
Select Gyro
Sensor
Select Gyro Sensor produces a drop

down box where the available sensors can
be viewed and selected (see section 6.38;
Sensor selection for general notes on
sensor availability).
The heading sensor name will change to

selected source.
Page 102 of 406

6.21.1 Analogue Gyro adjustment
Where analogue Gyro is selected, the heading can be manually

adjusted by placing the cursor in the digital readout for the Gyro
position.
The readout will change from a dark blue background to a red

background. Left click in the red box to enable manual gyro
adjustment.
The analogue gyro can now be manually adjusted as follows:
Coarse adjustment
Place the cursor on the chapter dial, the cursor changes to a
circular arrow.
Press and hold the left button and use the trackerball to adjust the
heading value
Fine adjustment
Use the Fine Adjust DOWN and Fine Adjust UP buttons to adjust the
gyro in +/ - 0.1deg steps.
Select DONE to accept the gyro value.
6.21.2 Rate of Turn (ROT)
Where available, the ROT (Rate of Turn) is received directly from the heading sensor.
If no rate of turn information is available it is automatically calculated by the system.
The rate of turn is shown as moving solid

block below the bearing scale in the
following colours:
Green for ROT to Starboard

Red for ROT to Port
The ROT value is also indicated by a digital

readout
Page 103 of 406

6.21.3 Heading indication and display
The Heading/ Gyro readout can be viewed in all enabled display modes as shown below.
Select the
Nav Data icon
Heading sensor
selection and
display in ECDIS
mode
Heading sensor
selection and
display in Single
Single radar display mode
display
Heading sensor
selection and
display in dual
display mode
Dual radar Select the

display Docking tab
NOTE: The
Heading source
CANNOT be
selected or
controlled from
the Docking tab.
This is a visual
indication of
heading only.
Page 104 of 406

6.22 Lines of Position (LOP)

Select the Position fixing icon.
Lines of Position (LOP) are NOT

AVAILABLE available in
Radar or Chart radar modes.
For position fixing see:

Section 6.32
Position fix
The manual position fix button allows the addition, management and deletion of lines of
position, position fixing and updating dead reckoning.
The position fixing icon has three tabs as follows:
LOP tab: Creation and placement of bearing lines and / or range circles.
Transfer tab: Transfer lines of position to other time.
Fix tab: Addition of position, dead reckoning and estimated position fixes (detailed in
the Position fix section).
6.22.1 LOP and position fixing display scales
NOTE: Lines of position and position fixes can only be displayed at

chart scales of 1:1000 to of 1:100000
Page 105 of 406

6.22.2 Line of position tab
The Line of Position tab is used for the addition and

positioning of lines of position in bearing and / or
range.
6.22.3 Add a line of position
With the cursor placed over the Add button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Add Bearing Add Range

LOP LOP
Add a Line Add a Line

of Position of Position
based on a No Function based on a
user defined user defined
bearing range
When the Add button is pressed, the time and date for the bearing or range line of position
is shown in the Time dialogue box. Having selected Add, you must now enter a Range or
Bearing value before positioning the Line of Position on the chart.
No keyboard fitted
On system without a keyboard,
the on-screen keyboard will
automatically appear when you
click in the Range or Bearing box
Place the cursor in the Range or

Bearing box. Using the
keyboard, enter the desired
value and click Accept.
NOTE: If the cursor is moved into the chart area before a range or bearing value is entered,
it will be necessary to click in the range and bearing entry box to enter the required value.
The range or bearing Line of Position can now be positioned on the chart in the desired
position.
NOTE: Once a Line of Position has been placed on screen, the

range or bearing values cannot be changed.
Page 106 of 406

6.22.4 Selection of Line of Position
When an LOP has been added, it is also appears in a box at the

top of the LOP tab.
Each line of position can be selected from the list and the selected
LOP name, range/ bearing and time can be viewed.
When selected, the text for the LOP changes from White to
Yellow.
6.22.5 Delete selected and Delete ALL Line of Position
To Delete a Selected line of position, select the range or bearing

line of position to be deleted and press the Delete button.
The selected Line of Position will be permanently deleted and

removed from the screen.
To Delete ALL lines of position, press the Delete ALL button
All bearing and range lines of position are permanently deleted

and removed from the screen.
Page 107 of 406

6.22.6 Transfer tab
The transfer tab is used to transfer a line of position to

the current time or to the time of another line of
position.
Transferring a line of position

In the example below, Bearing 1 is transferred to the time of Bearing 2.
Select the LOP to be Select the either: Press Transfer In this example,
transferred. Current Time Bearing 1 is
Press the or transferred to the time
Transfer to time of The LOP with the of bearing 2
Button and a drop desired time
down list appears
Lines of position that have been transferred will be shown on-screen as TPLxxxx where:
 TPL means transferred position line.
 xxxx is the time that the line of position has been transferred to; e.g. TPL1411
Page 108 of 406

Bearing 2 Bearing 2
shown as
Bearing 1 TPL 1706
Bearing 1
Bearing 1 (1704) and Bearing 2 (1706) in Bearing 1 (now marked TRL 1706)
their original positions transferred to the time of Bearing 2 (1706))
6.22.7 Restore a LOP to its original time
In the transferred position The selected LOP is restored to

lines box, select the line of the Available position lines box
position to be restored. and reverts to the time and
position it was originally added
Press the Restore button
Page 109 of 406

6.22.8 Fix tab line of position
For details on the Fix tab and

Position fixing, see Section 6.32
Page 110 of 406

6.23 Man overboard (MOB)
MOB in single and dual radar display MOB in ECDIS mode
With the cursor placed over the Man overboard button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right
Man
Overboard
Places an
MOB symbol
at ownship’s No Function No Function
current
position
MOB on Radar displays MOB on ECDIS display
6.23.1 Man overboard in dual display
When dual radar display is in use and a MOB is triggered, the MOB symbol automatically
appears in the PPI and ETD tabs.
Page 111 of 406

6.23.2 Man overboard selection
In all display modes, with the cursor placed over an MOB symbol on screen, the following
options are available:
Left Middle Right
Select
Acquire
Target
Selects the
MOB symbol See Target
No Function
Cursor over MOB below the Tracking
cursor
When an MOB symbol is selected, a blue square is placed around the MOB target and data
on the selected MOB is displayed in the target data panel.
MOB target selected in radar mode Target data panel for selected MOB
6.23.3 Man overboard past tracks
In all display modes, with past tracks switched ON, a past

track indicator will be placed on the MOB symbol.
See the Past tracks section for additional information.
MOB on radar display with past

track enabled
Page 112 of 406

6.23.4 Man overboard De-selection and deletion
In all display modes, with the cursor placed over a MOB that has already been selected, the
following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Deselect
Delete
Target Acquire
Deletes the
Deselects See Target
selected
the MOB Tracking
MOB
The MOB is de-selected Deletes the selected MOB symbol
The MOB is de selected but the

symbol remains on-screen.
The blue square around the MOB

target is removed.
Target data for the deselected MOB

symbol is no longer shown in the
target data panel.
YES: Permanently deletes the

selected MOB.
NO: Cancels the delete action.
NOTE: MOB symbols are NOT LOST when changing display modes or by
switching to the standby screen.
Page 113 of 406

6.24 Maps (user generated maps)
MAPS in main PPI of Select the User Maps icon.

The Maps feature allows the creation, viewing and management of user generated maps in all radar
and ECDIS modes.
NOTE: User maps cannot be created or viewed in the PPI or ETD tabs of
dual radar display.
There are two MAP modes as follows:
True maps: Available on the in radar and ECDIS mode.
Relative maps: Only available in radar modes. Relative maps are not available in
ECDIS mode.
Selecting Map mode:
MAPS in main PPI of Select the User Maps icon.

single and dual radar display True maps menu is displayed.
With the cursor placed over the Maps

button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Open
Open True
No Function Relative
Mapping
Mapping
Page 114 of 406

6.24.1 Loading / Deleting true and relative map (s)
With the cursor placed over the Load/ Delete map button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

Load True or Delete True The button description changes
Relative or Relative with the mapping mode selected
Map Map
Opens a Load/ Delete TRUE Map
Opens a dialogue box True mapping is selected
dialogue box showing a list (Radar and ECDIS modes)
showing a list of the
No Function
of the available Load/ Delete RELATIVE Map
available maps to
Relative mapping is selected
maps to load delete
(Radar modes ONLY)
Load Map Delete Map
Left click on Left click on

required required
map map
The selected map is loaded on screen and

shown in the Loaded Maps box.
OK: The selected Map is permanently

deleted.
Cancel: Cancels the delete action.
Multiple maps can be loaded on screen at

any one time
Page 115 of 406

6.24.2 Creating a new user map
To create a new map, ensure that no map(s) are selected by using the Clear/ Clear ALL
button.
Place the cursor on the Edit Selected Map button and select Edit Map.
New maps are created using the same method described in the following section ‘Editing
Selected maps’ but no map is loaded when starting the process.
6.24.3 Editing Selected Map
Open either True or Relative Mapping Select the User Map icon
Load the map to be edited, then with the cursor placed over the Edit Selected Map button, the
following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Edit Map
Opens the
map editing
menu
Map features are created by

selecting the desired feature or
symbol.
The cursor is used to position, draw

and size the selected feature.
Page 116 of 406

6.24.4 Creating map objects
With the required map object selected from the Select Edit Action list, the cursor options
are:
Left Middle Right
Start Draw
Or Cancel Draw No Function
Place Point
Start Draw Cancel draw

Starts drawing the selected map object on screen. Stops the creation of a line or symbol position at
the last placed point on the map object.
Once the first point has been placed/ drawn, the
button changes to Place Point.
For symbols, Place Point drops the symbol at the

current cursor position
6.24.5 Editing map objects
Left clicking on an existing map object

selects the feature for editing.
When selected, the edges and centre point is

marked by magenta square(s).
With the cursor over these squares, the

cursor cue changes to the following.
Left Middle Right

Select Item to Edit: Click on any
Select to
point of a map item and it Edit Item
becomes available for editing.
Select an
Drop Item: When any of the existing No Function No Function
map object
editing squares are selected, the
item can be moved and dropped
Left Middle Right
at a new position. Drop Item
Or Cancel
Select to move Item: Click on Select to Move
move item
the square in the centre of an
item or feature and the entire Select an
Cancels the
existing No Function
object can be moved. map object
last move
Cancel move cancels the last Left Middle Right

action. Insert to
Edit Item
Insert to Edit Item: If the cursor
is placed in-between one of the Select an
marker squares, a new position existing No Function No Function
map object
can be inserted.
Use End Edit to finish and save the map (see next section)
Page 117 of 406

6.24.6 Select edit action: Map editing buttons
When a map object is selected, other properties may be altered as below:
Set Colour: The colour of a map item can be changed at any point during the
creation or editing process. To change the colour, select the required
object then press the Set Colour button. Use the drop down list to
chose the desired colour. The colour panel to the right of the button
changes to reflect the selected colour.
Change text: When pressed, use the keyboard to add/ edit

text entries for the selected map feature.
Delete: Removes any map item that is currently

selected.
Rename: When pressed, use the keyboard to name or

rename the current map.
No Danger/ Dangerous: The safety status of a map item can be

changed at any point during the creation or
editing process. To change the safety status,
select the required object then press the No
Danger / Dangerous button and chose the
desired colour. The button name changes to
reflect the selection.
Line style: The line style of a map object can be changed at any point during the
creation or editing process. To change the line style, select the
required object then press the Solid line/ Dashed Line/ Dotted line
button and chose the desired style. The button description changes to
reflect the user’s selection.
Undo: Errors can be corrected by pressing the Undo button. Repeated

button presses will undo previous actions.
End Edit/ Exit: To exit the map-editing menu, select End Edit.
New Maps: You will be prompted with a warning requesting if you

wish to rename and save the map.
Existing maps: The edited map is saved.
Page 118 of 406

6.24.7 Merge / Save maps
Maps can be saved, copied or multiple maps can be merged into one single map with a new
name. With the cursor placed over the Merge / Save button, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Save Map
Merge Maps Save Map
AS
Saves the
Merges all
selected Saves the
loaded
map with a selected map
maps
new name.
Use the
Merge Maps keyboard to
Load any number re-name the
of maps and merged map.
select Merge The maps
Maps are merged
and saved as
one new
map
Save Map As…

Saves a new copy of a selected map under a different name; when requested, use the
keyboard to name/ rename the map.
Save Map
Saves any changes made to the map currently selected or being edited.
6.24.8 True or Relative Maps ON/ OFF
This function switches the display of maps ON and OFF. With the cursor placed over the True/
Relative Maps ON / OFF button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
True True
or or
Relative Relative
maps ON maps OFF
Switches
map display
Switches OFF
the display No Function Maps are
of maps ON removed
from the
True mapping Relative mapping screen
selected selected
NOTE: When True or Relative maps are switched OFF, the maps are removed from the display but
are NOT cleared from the memory or deleted. When Maps ON is pressed the map is presented on
screen again.
Page 119 of 406

6.24.9 Clearing User maps
With the cursor placed over the Clear / Clear ALL button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

Clear ALL
Clear Sel. True or
Map Relative
Maps
Clears the
Clears ALL
selected
No Function maps from
Map from
the screen
the screen
NOTE: Clearing maps removes them from the radar or chart display, it does not delete the
maps
6.24.10 Relative Mapping (radar only)
In radar modes, Relative Mapping is available. With the cursor placed over the Maps
button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

Open
Open True
Relative
Mapping
Mapping
Opens the Opens the

True Relative
No Function
Mapping mapping
menu menu
True Mapping Relative Mapping
All mapping functions have the same functionailty as described in the revious sections
however, in Relative mapping the menu has an additional button marked Change Map
Origin (see next section).
Page 120 of 406

In Relative Mapping, with the cursor placed over the Change Map Origin button the
Left Middle Right
Target Ownship
Origin Origin
Places the
Places the
origin of the
origin of the
map at the
No Function map at
position of a
ownship
selected
position
target
6.24.11 Closing Maps menu
When loading or editing of Maps is completed, the Mapping menus can be closed by
pressing the X located at the top right of the maps menu.
When the maps menu is closed, all loaded maps remain on screen.
To add, edit or remove maps the Maps menu needs to be re-opened.
Page 121 of 406

6.25 Mariner notes and events

Select the Mariners notes/ events icon.
Mariners Notes and Mariners Events are

NOT AVAILABLE available in Radar or Chart
radar modes.
6.25.1 Adding mariner notes
With the cursor placed over the Add / Edit Mariner Note button, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Add/ Edit
Note
Add or edit
mariner No Function No Function
notes
press Add/ Edit Mariner Note and place the cursor on the chart area where the note is
required and again click on the Add/ Edit mariner notes button.
A mariner note is placed at the cursor position and the following Add Mariner Note dialogue
opens where the mariner note can be configured
The Add Mariner Note

dialogue opens.
The Chart Query

dialogue also opens so
the position and (where
a feature has been
selected) the chart
features can be checked
and confirmed.
Page 122 of 406

Latitude, Longitude, date and time:

Values are adjusted by placing the cursor
over the value to be adjusted, press and hold
the right button, at this point arrows will
Entering details for a appear above and below the number to be
Mariner note: adjusted. Use the trackerball to adjust the
number to the desired value.
Use Current Date/ Time:
Reverts the time value to the current UTC
time. This can be used if the time is
accidently or incorrectly adjusted.
Note Type:
A drop down list
where Caution or
Information can
be selected.
Description: Using the keyboard, add the

description required for the
Mariners note.
ACCEPT: Places the mariners note on the

chart
Cancel: Abandons the note and closes the
Add mariner note dialogue box.
6.25.2 Viewing details on a Mariner note
To view details on a mariner note already placed

on screen, place the cursor over the Caution or
Information symbol associated with the note and
press Chart Query.
The text information on the note will appear in the

Chart Query panel.
6.25.3 Show Mariner notes text on screen
The viewing of the details of a mariners note on the chart area in managed in the Advanced
tab of Chart settings. To view the details tick the following boxes in chart settings:
 Text: Mariner Event Info
 Text: Mariner Notes Info
When the above are ticked, the text associated with all mariners notes and events will show
on screen:
Page 123 of 406

6.25.4 Editing and Deleting individual Mariner note(s)
With the cursor placed over the Add / Edit Mariner Note button, the following option is
available.
Left Middle Right
Add/ Edit
Note
Add or edit
mariner No Function No Function
notes
Place the cursor on the Mariner note to be edited or deleted and press Add/ Edit Mariner
Note.
The same dialog box is presented as is used for

adding a note.
EDIT: All details for the selected note can be edited or

adjusted.
Accept: Accepts any chances made.
Delete: Permanently delete the selected note.
Cancel: Abandons any changes and closes the edit

mariners note box.
6.25.5 Deleting ALL notes
With the cursor placed over the Delete all notes button, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Delete ALL
notes
Permanently
deletes ALL
mariner
notes
When Delete ALL Notes is selected, the system will ask for a password.
The default Captain’s password for clearing the past track is: PASSWORD. The password
can be changed by the user in the Alarm Configuration page (see chapter 7).
WARNING: Passwords cannot be remotely reset. If a password is

changed and forgotten, an engineer will need to attend to reset the
password. Attendance to reset a lost or forgotten password is not covered
under warranty.
Page 124 of 406

6.25.6 Adding Mariner Events
Mariner Events places a symbol and a text note at ownship’s current position. With the cursor placed
over the Add Event button, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Add Event
Adds an
event at
ownship No Function No Function
current
position
The latitude, longitude, current date and time values are fixed at
ownship position at the exact moment the Add Event button is
pressed.
These values cannot be adjusted.
Description: Using the keyboard, add a mariner event

description.
Accept: Accepts the Mariners Event.

Cancel: Abandons the note and closes the Mariner Event box
without saving changes.
6.25.7 Viewing Mariner Events
To view details on a mariner event, place the

cursor over the event and press Chart Query.
The information on the event will appear in the

Chart Query panel.
6.25.8 Editing and deleting individual Mariner Events
Mariner Events cannot be edited or individually deleted.
Page 125 of 406

6.25.1 Deleting ALL mariner events
With the cursor placed over the Delete all notes button, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Delete ALL
Events
Permanently
deletes ALL
mariner
events
When Delete ALL Events is selected, the system will ask for a password.
The default Captain’s password for clearing all Mariner events is: PASSWORD. The
password can be changed by the user in the Alarm Configuration page (see chapter 7).

password.
Attendance to reset a lost or forgotten password is not covered under

warranty.
Page 126 of 406

6.26 Orientation
6.26.1 North-UP, Head-UP & Course-UP
Orientation in Single Radar Display Orientation in ECDIS mode
Orientation in Dual radar display
With the cursor placed over the orientation button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
North-UP Head-UP Course-UP
North-UP Head-UP Course-UP
Information is shown in the Information is shown on the Information is shown on the

display with the North direction display with ownship’s heading display with the direction of the
upward pointing upward. vessel’s course upward.
Head-up corresponds to the The alignment of the chart does

visual view from the bridge in not change as the heading
the direction of ownship’s changes
heading.
This orientation may require

frequent rotations of the
display contents. Changing the
ship’s course or yawing of the
vessel may render this non
stabilised orientation mode
unreadable.
6.26.2 Relative and True motion
Page 127 of 406

Relative/ True in Single Radar Display Elative/ True in ECDIS mode
Orientation in Dual radar display
With the cursor placed over the Relative/ True button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
True/Relative Max
Centre reset
Motion Lookahead
Switches
Resets
between See
Ownship to
True motion Ownship
the centre of
or relative position
the screen
motion
Relative Motion True Motion

Ownship is in a fixed position on the display The chart is fixed and ownship moves across
and the chart scrolls underneath the display.
The chart resets once the ship approaches the

edge of the display to give a maximum look
ahead. The True motion reset box is configured
in Ownship Settings
The button name will change to reflect the mode selected.
Trails orientation
The orientation of trails is indicated in brackets after the RM or TM indication.
 Relative Motion and True trails: RM(T)

 Relative motion and Relative trails: RM(R)
 True Motion and True trails: TM(T)
 True motion and Relative trails: TM(R)
Page 128 of 406

6.27 Ownship position
6.27.1 Ownship position
In Radar and ECDIS modes, with the cursor placed over ownship, ownship’s position can be
offset on the display. With the cursor placed over Ownship, the following options are
available
Left Middle Right Left Middle Right
Centre Set Max Centre Set Ownship

Offset Centre
Reset Lookahead Reset Position
Changes the Ownship

Resets
cursor Resets position can
Ownship to
options to Ownship to be moved
No Function the centre See below
ownship the centre of with the
of the
offset the screen cursor.
screen
options See below
Set Max Lookahead Set Ownship Position
Places ownship position near the edge of Ownship position can be moved with the
the display giving the largest display in the cursor.
direction of the ownship’s vector Pressing Set Ownship position drops ownship
at the current cursor position.
Radar set to Max Lookahead

Radar with user defined offset
In ECDIS mode, ownship can be moved within

a box marked close to the edge of the chart
area. Ownship cannot be positioned outside of
this box.
ECDIS set to Max Lookahead
ECDIS showing Set ownship position box
Page 129 of 406

6.27.2 Ownship button (ECDIS only)
In ECDIS mode, the Own Ship button is used to set the

best scale or fixed scale functions.
With the cursor placed over the Own Ship button the
following options are available.
Left Middle Right
RM Best TM Best Fixed Chart

Scale Scale Mode
RM Best Scale TM Best Scale Fixed Chart Mode
Places the chart presentation Places the chart Allows the user to move the
into Relative motion with presentation into True chart away from ownship.
chart Best scale motion with the chart Best
automatically selected. scale automatically
In RM best scale, the chart selected.
cannot be moved away from In TM best scale, the chart
ownship’s position. cannot be moved away from
ownship’s position.
Did you know…
Lost ownship?
If Ownship is not showing on the display, i.e. the system is in Fixed
Chart Mode, pressing RM Best Scale or TM best Scale will centre
the chart on Ownship.
Page 130 of 406

6.28 Ownship setting
Ownship settings in Select the Ownship Settings icon

The Ownship Settings button provides access to the tabs for Ownship Settings, Past
Track and look-ahead.
Ownship setting in Radar modes
NOTE: Some functionally in ownship settings is only available when the

system has been enabled as a Chart Radar in optional features.
A note in the relevant section of the handbook will advise where a feature
is not available.
6.28.1 Ownship tab
Vector management:
The following vector functions are details in section 6.57
• Vector length
• Vessel predictor (Show path predictor and Show vessel
outlines)
• Predictor length
• Vector Time marks
Page 131 of 406

Ownship outline ON/ OFF
Enables and disables the ownship outline.
With the cursor placed over the Ownship outline ON/ OFF the options noted below are
available:
Note: Ownship outline is not displayed if it is less than 6.0mm on screen
WARNING: The dimensions of the ownship outline are for reference only.
Ownship outline parameters are set during commissioning of the system
and cannot be accessed the user.
Stern Line ON/ OFF
Enables and disables a stern line for the vessel. With the cursor placed over the Stern Line
ON/ OFF the options noted below are available:
Left Middle Right

Toggle
Ownship
outline
Switches
ownship
outline
ON/ OFF
Left Middle Right
Toggle Stern
Line
Switches
the Stern
line
ON/ OFF
Ownship position with Ownship position with

Ships Outline and Ships Outline and
Stern Marker OFF Stern Marker ON
Page 132 of 406

Curved Heading Line
In the Ownship tab, with the cursor placed over the Curved Heading Line button, the
following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Toggle
Curved H/L
Enable
or
Disable No Function No Function
curved
heading line
The curved heading line projects a curved heading line ahead of

ownship based on a course, rate of turn, speed and time delay all
of which are configured using the following buttons:
Course: The trial Course can be changed in +5 and -5 deg

steps.
The Course value can be fine tuned by adjusting

the bearing value (degrees) using the trackerball.
Course bearing using next leg: When a route is loaded, the Next Leg button becomes
available.
Left Middle Right
Use Next
Leg Bearing
Set the
Curved H/L
bearing to No Function No Function
next
waypoint
When pressed, the Next Leg button sets the curved heading line to match the bearing
associated with the next waypoint in the route.
Page 133 of 406

Radius/ ROT: With the cursor placed over the Radius /ROT button, the following
options are available. The Radius/ ROT value can be fine tuned by
adjusting the distance value (NM) using the trackerball.
Left Middle Right
Use Radius Use ROT
The curved
The curved
heading line
heading line No Function
uses Rate Of
uses Radius
Turn
Speed: The speed can be changed in +1 and -1 knot steps. The speed value
can be fine tuned by adjusting the speed value (knots) using the
trackerball.
Delay: Delay is the time before ownship starts the trial turn shown by the
curved heading line. The delay can be decreased and increased in 1
minute steps between 1 and 30 minutes.
Fix H/L to ground: With the cursor placed over the Fix H/L to ground button, the
Left Middle Right
Fix H/L Reset Timer
Activates
Resets the
the curved
No Function timer to 10.0
heading line
minutes
delay
When Fix H/L is pressed, the curved heading line is fixed and the delay countdown starts
from the Delay value set. When the timer reaches 00:00, the curved heading line moves
with ownship showing the planned turn.
Curved heading line in dual display
When dual display is in use, the curved heading line is also displayed in the PPI and ETD
tab.
Page 134 of 406

Manual adjustment of curved heading line
Solid line: The curved heading line can be manually

Delay period adjusted by left clicking the cursor on
each of the two dots found on the curved
1st dot:
heading line.
NOTE: If no course has been entered in

Solid line:
the curved heading line settings, the
curved heading line will be the same as
the main heading line.
2nd dot:
1st dot (Start of turn): Adjusts the delay.
2nd dot (End of turn): Adjusts the radius/

ROT
Example of curved heading line in ECDIS mode
Page 135 of 406

True motion settings
NOTE: In the ownship tab, the True Motion Settings button is only
available when True Motion mode has been selected. If True
motion is NOT enabled the button text is black and the True Motion
Settings button cannot be accessed.
True motion selected in Radar mode True motion selected in ECDIS mode
With the cursor is placed over the True Motion Settings button, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Show/ Hide Set TM limit Edit TM

TM limits to defaults limits
Switches Resets the

Enables the
the display TM limits to
editing of the
of TM limits the factory
TM limits box
ON/ OFF default size
Left Middle Right

Select TM
Reset Box
Set TM limit Quit TM
When Edit TM Limits has been selected and the or
to defaults Reset Edits
Fix TM
cursor is placed over the True Motion limits box, Reset Box
the following options become available. Square Select the
Resets the
edge of the Quits editing
TM limits to
TM limits of the TM
the factory
box for limits box
default size
editing
Press Select TM Reset Box Press Fix TM reset Box

Place cursor on edge of TM box True Motion box is selected True Motion box adjusted
Outline of box becomes BOLD
Use cursor to re-size TM box
Page 136 of 406

There are two edges that can be adjusted on the true motion reset box
When the cursor is used to select the true When the cursor is used to select the true
motion box ahead of ownship, three sides motion box aft (behind) ownship, one side
of the box (ahead, port and starboard) of the box (aft) becomes bold.
become bold.
This edge is the ‘reset’ distance from the
The size of the box can be adjusted to edge of the screen
resize the true motion reset box. i.e. how close to the edge of the screen
ownship will be when it resets to the start
of the true motion box. This line will always
be behind ownship.
Page 137 of 406

6.28.2 Past Track Tab
Ownship settings in Select the Ownship Settings icon

The Past track tab offers management of the historic trail of ownship position. Archived
tracks can also be viewed using the replay functions.
Track Length
The length of the past track displayed on screen can be varied. This may be useful for
vessels that carry out regular journeys or follow short routes.
With the cursor placed over the Track Length button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

Set Max
Length of
Vessel
Track
Opens a
drop down
box showing
a range of
track length
intervals
The button name will change to reflect the track length selected.
Note: Changing the length of the track does not delete data.
For example; the system stores 3 months of past track information,
if the track length is set to 30 minutes, the system still holds all 3
months worth of data.
Page 138 of 406

Tick intervals
When enabled, a timed marker is dropped at ownship’s position and can be viewed on the
vessels past track. For example, if the tick interval is set to 10 minutes, the ‘ticks’ will be
placed on the hour, 10 minutes past the hour , 20 minutes past the hour etc)
The time interval of the markers can be varied as follows:
Left Middle Right
Set Tick
Interval
Opens a
drop down
box showing
a range of
tick
intervals
No Ticks: Switches tick intervals OFF.

Automatic ticks: Automatically set a time-period suitable for the chart scale or range in
use.
1 Min to 1 day: Sets the period of tick delay
The button name will change to reflect the tick interval selected.
Page 139 of 406

Clear past tracks
The whole vessel track can be cleared by placing the cursor over the Clear Past Track
button and clicking on Clear Track.
Left Middle Right
Clear Tracks
Deletes ALL
track No Function No Function
histories
WARNING: Once deleted, past tracks are permanently deleted and

cannot be replayed using the voyage replay function.
Tracks can be saved to an external memory device (see replay archived data and backup
and restore)
Clear Past Track password ownship
The default Captain’s password for clearing the past track is: PASSWORD.
The password can be changed by the user in the Alarm Configuration page
(See chapter 7).

under warranty.
Page 140 of 406

Replay archive Data
Ownship tracks can be backed-up to a virus free USB flash drive from the Backup and
Restore function which is accessed from the Standby screen. (See backup and restore / section 8
for additional information).
To replay archived data directly from the memory stick use the Replay archive data button.
Open replay archived data Selected Drive Select archived data Load the 12-hour log
The USB flash drive will be the highest drive letter in the list. In a normal system, the drives
are allocated as follows:
A: Floppy drive (where fitted)

C: Main hard drive
D: DVD-Rom
E: Normally the USB flash drive
A backup-up file on a memory stick will have the following name/ format:
MD backup Ship name 20110512 1500

Name of vessel YY / MM / DD & UTC time
the backup was taken
• Within the backup file there will be a folder called 12-hour log which is the 12 hours of
recorded data.
• Select the folder called 12-hour log and press Load.
• Once an archive is loaded it can be replayed using voyage replay control (see Replay
control in the following pages).
Page 141 of 406

Replay file cannot be found
When selecting the file to load, you may not initially

see the drives.
Alternatively you many have accidently selected

the incorrect drive or file.
In this instance press ../ which takes the folders

back-up one level.
Repeatedly presses will return you to the drive

listing.
Replay Voyage data
The last 12 hours of ownship track data is automatically stored in the system and can be
replayed using the Replay Voyage Data function.
The data is replayed from the current UTC time
With the cursor placed over the voyage data button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right

Start
Voyage
Replay
Replays the
last 12 hours No Function No Function
of data
Opens the Replay control
The data can now be replayed using voyage replay control (see Replay control in the
following pages).
Page 142 of 406

Voyage replay control ownship
The voyage track contains the following data:

 Heading
 Speed
 Position and datum
 Tracked targets
 Current cell description (Chart radar and ECDIS modes only)
 Selected Antenna offsets (Radar modes or where the optional radar interlay is enabled
and in use).
When Replay Archive Data or Replay Voyage Data is selected, the relevant data is loaded
and the following Voyage Replay control appears on screen.
Replay control buttons

Jump to Start
Jumps to the start of the selected file
Decrease Replay rate
Repeated presses decrease the rate of play by x1 to x10
Pause / Play
Pauses or plays the selected data
Increase Replay rate
Repeated presses increase the rate of play by x1 to x10
Jump to End
Jumps to the end of the selected data file
Current replay rate
Indicates the rate of replay between X1 (normal) and X10 (fast)
Time indication
Shows the time from 0 (current time) back to -12 (current time -12
hours)
Replay time
Shows the UTC time for the data being replayed
Close
Closes the replay session
During replay, the Replay Archive Data or Replay Voyage Data

buttons in the past track tab are blacked out.
Page 143 of 406

6.28.3 Look-Ahead tab
Ownship settings/ look ahead tab in Select the Ownship Settings icon
The Look ahead is a user definable, three dimensional safety area that is centered on
ownship.
It takes into account the safety settings for Safety Contour, Air Draught, Look-Ahead and
Clearance.
Based on the chart data being displayed, if Look Ahead detects an area of danger,
encounters a dangerous object, or enters shallow water an alarm sounds notifying the user
of the nature of the danger.
The look-ahead time, clearance range and what objects will cause a Look-ahead alarm can
be configured as shown in the following section.
Look-ahead in Radar mode
NOTE
Look-ahead only operates in radar mode if the optional Chart
Radar is enabled. If Chart Radar is NOT enabled, the look ahead
can still be enabled but has no function and will not sound alarms.
When Chart radar and look ahead are both enabled, look-ahead
alarms will sound when the Chart display is switched OFF.
Page 144 of 406

Look-ahead ‘on-screen’
Look-ahead zone display OFF Look-ahead zone display ON
Example of look ahead with clearance area swept out based Example of Look-ahead alarm
on COG, SOG and drift.
Enable/ disable look-ahead ownship
With the cursor placed over the look-ahead Enable/ Disable button, the following option is
available.
Left Middle Right

Enable /
Disable
Look-ahead
Switches
the Look-
ahead menu
ON/ OFF
Page 145 of 406

Look-Ahead Zone display ON/ OFF
With the cursor placed over the Look-ahead zone display OFF button, the following option
is available.
Left Middle Right
Show/ Hide
Look-ahead
Switches
the Look-
ahead ON/
OFF
Look-ahead password
The default Captain’s password for enabling or disabling look-ahead is: PASSWORD. The
password can be changed by the user in the Alarm Configuration page (see chapter 7).

under warranty.
Adjusting look-ahead time and clearance
Left Middle Right
Adjust Look-
Ahead
Look-Ahead
time can be
adjusted
between 0.1
to 30
minutes
Left Middle Right
Show/ Hide
Look-ahead
Look-Ahead
clearance
can be
adjusted
between 0.1
to 6.0 NM
Caution: There can be a delay of up to 10 seconds between adjusting the

time or clearance parameters, and the change occurring to the look-ahead
box on-screen.
Page 146 of 406

Configure Check button ownship
The configure check button is used to configure which objects will alarm if they enter the
look-ahead zone.
NOTE: Configure Parameters and Initiate Route Checking is

shown in more detail in the Route Planning chapter (section 10)
Selecting Configure check opens the Configure Parameters and Initiate Route
Checking box.
Objects in full check

Used for full checking of a
route and is NOT used for
Look-ahead.
Objects in this box will
not trigger a look ahead
alarm
Objects in safety check

Lists objects that will
cause an alarm if they
enter the Look-ahead
area.
Add to or remove from

safety checks
Adds or removes selected
items to and from Objects
in safety check
Reset Safety checks

Resets Objects listed in
the Object in safety
check list to the factory
defaults
Page 147 of 406

Selecting objects in configure check
With the cursor placed over an object in the Full check or Safety check columns, the
Left Middle Right
Select/ Block Select/

Deselect Deselect
Select or Selects a
deselect and block of
No Function
individual objects (see
or object below)
To use the block select
Left click on Anchor berth then place All items from Anchor berth to Buoy, Safe
cursor over Buoy, Safe water and right click water are selected.
Block Select Right clicking again on a block will
deselect all.
Safety contour, depth and height
When Configure Parameters and Initiate Route Checking is opened, the safety contour,
depth and height figures can be viewed and adjusted.
All values and adjustments are directly linked to those found in the Chart settings menus.
Page 148 of 406

6.29 Parallel Index Lines
Parallel Index lines in Select the Nav tools icon.

6.29.1 Adding parallel index lines
With the cursor placed over the PI line button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
PI lines ON PI lines OFF
Switches Switches
parallel parallel
No Function
index lines index lines
ON OFF
1st press: Green PI line ON. 1st press: Purple PI line switched off
2nd press: Red PI line ON. 2nd press: Blue PI line switched off
3rd press: Blue PI line ON. 3rd press: Red PI line switched off
4th press: Purple PI line ON. 4th press: Green PI line switched off.
PI line 1
PI line 2
PI line 3
PI line 4
Example of all Parallel index lines switched ON in radar mode
Page 149 of 406

6.29.2 Adjusting PI lines
When the cursor is placed over a Parallel Index line, the line becomes BOLD.
Example of an un-selected PI line
Example of a selected PI line (bold)
There are two ‘dots’ on each PI line and the cursor function changes depending on its
positioned on the PI line.
Outside of dots Between dots Outside of dots
Bearing Range Bearing

adjustment adjustment adjustment
Adjust Adjust
Acquire Delete Acquire Delete
Range Bearing
Press to Press to
Switches the select the PI Switches the
select the PI See Target See Target
selected PI line to selected PI
line to tracking tracking
line OFF adjust line OFF
adjust range
bearing
Using the trackerball, Using the trackerball,

position the parallel position the parallel
index line at the index line at the
desired range. desired bearing.
Set Range Reset Value Set Bearing Reset Value
Accepts the Accepts the

Resets the Resets the
new range new bearing
range to the bearing to
of the No Function of the No Function
original the original
selected PI selected PI
value value
line line
Page 150 of 406

6.30 Passwords
Various functions within the MantaDigital software require the user to enter a password.
Function Password required for… Location Password
Alarm Any changes made in the Accessed from the

Configuration alarm configuration page Standby screen
Enabling or disabling the Ownship settings / The factory

Look-ahead default
look ahead function Look-ahead tab
password for all
Required for clearing past Ownship settings / four functions is:
Clear past tracks
tracks Past track tab PASSWORD
Mariners notes/ Route tools /
Required for deletion of
events Mariners notes/
mariners notes or events
(ECDIS mode only) events
The password can be changed by the user in the Alarm Configuration page (See chapter 7).

under warranty.
The following also require password but access is prohibited for the system user:
Operator access to the Set-up mode is not permitted

Set-up mode
The Set-up mode allows for configuration of the system
Access is only granted to Kelvin Hughes authorised engineers
Windows desktop Access to the Windows desktop is strictly prohibited
WARNING: Attempting to access the windows desktop will

invalidate the warranty status of the system.
Note: Access to the Set-up page or the Windows desktop is monitored and logged by the
system.
Page 151 of 406

6.31 Past Position indicator
Past position in Single and Dual radar display Select the Target Data icon.
Past positions of tracked Radar targets, AIS targets, MOB symbols and (when selected)
position fixes are generated by dropping a past position marker every minute.
The past position slider bar is used to set the total past position time. Past positions can be
either true or relative.
With the cursor placed over the Past Position button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Past Pos. Rest Past Past Pos.

True/Relative Position ON/OFF
Switch Clears all Switches

between Past Past
True and Position Positions ON/
Relative indicators. OFF
(only when
radar trails
are OFF; see
next section)
SHIP TURNING SHIP RUNNING SHIP’S SPEED SHIP’S SPEED

STRAIGHT DECREASING INCREASING
CD-7453 ISSUE 1
Past position indicator
Page 152 of 406

6.31.1 Past Position True/ Relative
Trails OFF: With trails switched OFF, the past position indicator can be switched between
True (T) and Relative (R) using the Past position button.
Trails ON: When Trails are switched ON, past positions True and Relative are linked to
the Trails button.
 True & Relative cannot be selected from the Past position button.
 When True or Relative are selected using the Trails button, the Past
position button follows the trails selection.
NOTE 1: In ECDIS mode, select the Radar Control icon to

access the Trails button.
NOTE 2: When past positions are switched OFF, the graphics are
removed from the screen but the data is not deleted i.e. when Past
Positions are switch ON again, previous positions are still shown.
Page 153 of 406

6.32 Position Fixing
Position FIX in Single and Dual radar display Select the Nav data icon
Place the cursor on the FIX button, the following option is available
Left Middle Right
Fix Position
Opens the
position No Function No Function
fixing menu
Pressing Fix position opens the following tab Pressing Fix position automatically selects
the Position Fix icon and opens the LOP
tab.
Position Fix icon
Position FIX menu in Single and Dual radar

display
Position FIX tab
Position fixing functions are identical in both radar and ECDIS modes
Did you know…?

In ECDIS modes, you can also access
the Position fixing menu by selecting the
Position Fix (LOP) icon
Page 154 of 406

6.32.1 Add a Position Fix
Before using the Add fix button, select the desired ‘type of fix’ from the fix type drop-down
list.
Left Middle Right
Source of
Fix
Opens a
drop down
list
containing
available
datum’s
NOTE: the default fix type is visual bearing.
Having selected a fix type, place the cursor over the Add fix button. The following options
are available:
Left Middle Right
Add Fix Add DR Add EP
Adds an
Adds a dead
Adds a estimated
reckoning
position fix position (EP)
(DR) fix
fix
Click on Add Fix, Add DR or Add EP and move the cursor onto radar or chart display.
Depending on the fix type selected above, the cursor symbol will change to one of the
following symbols
Visual bearing Radar range Visual/ radar GNSS Loran
Astronomical Other (no text by symbol) Dead reckoning Estimated position
Dead reckoning based on Estimated position based on

GNSS a visual fix
NOTE: In the above, the four digit numbers represent the time the fixes were created
Placing the fix
Page 155 of 406

With the cursor position at the required fix position on the radar or chart display, the following
options are available.
Left Middle Right
Place Fix on
Acquire
chart
Acquires a
Adds a radar target
No Function
position fix (See target
tracking)
Press Place Fix on chart and the position fix is dropped at the current cursor position.
The fix position and time that the fix was dropped are
shown
Notes/ comments for the fix can be added using the

keyboard in the Comment box.
CAUTION:
At this point, the fix is NOT accepted.

Pressing Cancel cancels and deletes the current fix
NOTE: ECDIS/ Chart radar modes. When a fix is placed on a chart, all bearing and range
lines of position created since the last position fix are associated with the latest fix position.
LOP(s) are removed from the screen and are also removed from the list of available position
lines in the LOP tab.
A visual fix positioned at the crossing point When the Visual fix is placed, the bearing
of two bearing LOPs LOPs are no longer shown
Page 156 of 406

6.32.2 Use Position Fix to update dead reckoning
With a fix placed on the radar or chart display, pressing Update DR button gives the
following option:
Left Middle Right
Use fix to
update DR
Accepts the
fix and
updates the No Function No Function
DR position.
NOTE: Once accepted, changes cannot be made to the time, date, position or comments for the fix.
6.32.3 Accept a position fix
With a fix placed on the radar or chart display, pressing the Accept button gives the
following option:
Left Middle Right
Accept Fix
Accepts the
fix
NOTE: Once accepted, Changes cannot be made the time, date, position or comments.
WARNING: ACCEPTING a fix does not update the DR position
Page 157 of 406

6.32.4 Show or hide position fix
When the Show position fixes button is pressed the following drop down list is presented:
Show Position Fixes Position fixes are shown

Hide position fixes Position fixes are NOT shown
Position fixes shown with Position fixes are shown and controlled as part of the
Past Track past track.
The button name will change to reflect the selection
6.32.5 Cancel a fix
Fixes can be cancelled before they are accepted as a fix or a dead reckoning update. With
the cursor over the Cancel button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right
Cancel Fix
Cancels the
fix
Page 158 of 406

6.32.6 Reviewing a Position fix
Function not available in Radar modes ECDIS & Chart radar modes only
In ECDIS and Chart Radar modes, Details of a position fix can be reviewed by placing the
cursor over the position fix symbol and left clicking (Chart Query).
Left Middle Right
Chart Query Set Centre
Press to
obtain
information
on the
See
feature No Function
Set Centre
below the
current
cursor
position
The detail of the fix and any associated range or bearing

LOP(s) are displayed in Chart features as Position fix.
Use the + / - symbols next to the text entry to expand or

collapse the data within the dialogue box.
Page 159 of 406

6.33 Position Sensor
6.33.1 Sensor selection and control
Position sensor in Select the Nav data icon

Place the cursor anywhere on the Position sensor Selection bar
Left Middle Right
Select Pos
Sensor
Select Pos
Sensor
Select Pos Sensor produces a drop down box where the available position sensors can be
viewed and selected (see section 6.38; Sensor selection for general notes on sensor
availability). The heading sensor name will change to selected source and the selected
position is displayed as Lat and Lon
Differential position (DGPS) indicator
Where a DGPS signal is being received, a ‘D’ will

appear in the position sensor selection bar.
Where there is no symbol, the selected position

sensor is not a DGPS system.
If the DGPS signal is of questionable accuracy, the

indicator will change to ‘?’
Page 160 of 406

6.33.2 Position Offset
An offset can be applied to a GPS position as follows:
Place the cursor over LAT (latitude) or LON (longitude) and the following options become
available.
Left Middle Right
Apply Offset Reset Offset
Removes
Apply an
the offset
offset in LAT
and
or LON to No Function
switches the
the current
offset
position
display OFF.
Apply Offset Reset Offset
Press Apply Offset to open a slider bar Pressing Reset Offset removes all offset
below the LAT or LON box. values from the current position and
switches the offset display OFF.
With the cursor placed over the slider

bar, press and hold the left button and
use the tracker ball to adjust the Latitude
or Longitude offset as required.
The offset value and direction is

displayed to the right of the LAT or LON
button.
Page 161 of 406

6.33.3 Adjusting offset cardinal directions
With the cursor placed over the Latitude OR Longitude Position offset value, the offset
dialogue background will change from black to light blue and the following options will
become available:
Left Middle Right
Offset North Offset South

(LAT) (LAT)
Offset East Offset West

(LON) (LON)
Button Button
Displays: Displays:
North when South when

cursor is over cursor is over
No Function
LAT offset LAT offset
or or
East when West when
cursor is over cursor is over
LON offset LON offset
Offset North/ East Offset South/ West
With the cursor placed over the LAT With the cursor placed over the LON
offset, applies a North offset when offset, applies a South offset when
adjusting Latitude. adjusting Latitude.
With the cursor placed over the LON With the cursor placed over LON
offset, applies an East offset when offset, applies a West offset when
adjusting Longitude. adjusting Longitude.
Page 162 of 406

6.33.4 Position Datum
Place the cursor on the Datum button
Left Middle Right
Select
Datum
Opens a
drop down
list of
datum’s
The default datum is WGS84
Select the required datum; the

button name will change to the
selected datum.
All positions will now be displayed in the selected datum.
The CCRP, Cursor, Target Data position, Chart Features, Route Planning table and DR
position are converted to the selected datum.
Position values shown are converted to the datum selected for display, but are stored
internally as WGS84 datum.
NOTE 1: If a datum is unrecognised and alarm is generated and the datum is not converted.
NOTE 2: The datum defaults to WGS84 at switch on but any datum selected is remembered
whilst the display is switched ON.
Page 163 of 406

6.33.5 Position Check
Position Check shows the difference between the position sensor currently selected and the
other available position sensors.
Place the cursor on the Check button
Left Middle Right
Check
position
Opens the
position No Function No Function
check panel
When Check is selected, the values of position sensors are shown and the differences
(including dead reckoning) are shown in the Position Check box.
.
Example showing GPS2 and DR Position
Close Position Check function
To Close the Check function and return to the standard GPS readout press the red cross X
at the top right of the Check GPS screen:
Page 164 of 406

6.34 Profiles
Profile button in
Single Radar display
mode
Profile button in
Dual Radar display
mode
The screen set-up of both single and dual radar display modes can be saved and managed
using the Profile function.
The following user configurable parameters are saved in profiles:
 AIS settings including Class A Targets,

 Range Rings On/Off
Class B Targets, ATON, Sleeping
Targets and Target Association
 Range Scale
 Chart Display settings
 Route settings
 Correlation Mode and settings
 Stabilisation Mode (Sea, Manual,
Ground)
 CPA and TCPA Limits
 Stern Line On/Off
 Cursor Cue settings
 Trails Mode (True, Relative) and Trails
 Display Offset
Length
 Gain, Sea and Rain settings
 Transceiver tuning (manual or auto)
 Motion Mode (North Up, Course Up,
 Vector Mode (True, Relative), Length
Head Up)
and Timer Marks
 Past Position Mode (True, Relative) and
 Video Settings (Data, Graphics,
Length
Chart/Map, Nav Tools, Targets, Radar,
Trails, Radar and Trails colours)
 Predictor Vector settings
Page 165 of 406

With the cursor placed over the Profile button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Change Default
User Profile Profile
Reverts the
Opens the
profile to the
user profile No Function
default
menu
settings
Load:
Left clicking on Load opens a drop down box

where default and user created/ saved profiles
can be selected.
The button name will change to reflect the

selected profile.
Save (including save NEW profile):
Left clicking on Save opens a drop down box

where default and user profiles can be saved.
Selecting New saves the current screen set-

up as a new profile. When new is selected,
use the keyboard to rename the profile and
click accept. The newly named profile will now
be available for selection in the Load menu
Remove:
Left clicking on Remove opens a drop down

box where user profiles can be deleted.
A profile cannot be deleted if:

 It is a factory default profile.
• The profile is set as a starting profile. The
required profile must be de-selected from
starting profiles prior to deletion.
Starting:
The profile set as a Starting profile is

automatically selected for use when the
display is switched ON. Left clicking on
Starting opens a drop down box where user
profiles can be selected for use as a start-up
profile.
To close the User Profile settings menu, click

on the X at the top-right of the menu.
Page 166 of 406

6.34.1 Last settings
‘Last settings’ appears as a profile when:
You are in a radar mode; for example single radar display and a change is made to one of
profile settings; for example the range is changed.
Alternatively; last settings will appear if another display mode is selected; for example
ECDIS mode and you return to your original display mode. The profile will show as last
settings, this being the original profile plus any changes made to the display settings.
6.34.2 Import / Export profiles
Profiles can be imported and exported to a virus free USB memory stick.
WARNING: See Section 2 for information regarding use of USB memory

stick and anti-virus precautions.
With the cursor placed over the import / Export button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Import Export
Profiles Profiles
Import
previously
Export all
saved
profiles to a
profiles from No Function
USB memory
a USB
device
memory
device
Import Profiles
When Import is selected, all user profiles found on the USB memory device are imported
and merged with the existing user profiles. There are no confirmation messages that the
import has been completed.
WARNING: When importing user profiles from another display or from an

older copy of the UserProfile.ini file, the contents of the USB memory
device will overwrite any profiles on the system with the same profile
name.
If no memory device can be found or there is no UserProfile.ini file on the USB memory
device, the following warning will be displayed:
Page 167 of 406

Export Profiles
When export is selected, all profiles are saved to the USB memory
device in a file called UserProfiles.ini
This file is approximately 100Kb in size
If a profile file already exists on the USB device, the following warning is displayed:
Press OK to overwrite the previous file or Cancel to abandon the export.
When exported, User Profiles can be loaded/ imported into other Kelvin Hughes
MantaDigital processors using the Import function.
6.34.3 Profiles in ECDIS
When exiting ECDIS mode (return to standby or change to another display mode), the
display settings are automatically retained and used when ECDIS mode is re-selected.
These settings are automatically stored and cannot be accessed.
Page 168 of 406

6.35 Radar control
6.35.1 Dynamic Clutter SuppressionTM
Dynamic clutter suppression in Select the Radar Control icon.

NOTE: For Dynamic clutter suppression to be operational in ECDIS

mode, Radar Interlay must be enabled in optional features (see
radar interlay).
Dynamic Clutter SuppressionTM automatically suppresses clutter, adjusting to the prevailing

conditions over time. When Dynamic Clutter Suppression is enabled, the Sea and Rain
filters are replaced with a single adjuster for Dynamic Clutter Suppression.
Left Middle Right
Enable /
Disable DCS
Switches
the dynamic
Clutter
suppression
ON/ OFF
Left Middle Right
Adjust
Suppression
Adjust the
level of
suppression
Sea & Rain filters are replaced by DCS
Keeping the Adjust Suppression button pressed, use the cursor to adjust the Dynamic
Clutter Suppression to the desired level.
Page 169 of 406

Example of Dynamic Clutter Control with radar returns in heavy rain with 8 to 12M waves
DCS OFF DCS set to zero DCS set to 5 (maximum)
Page 170 of 406

6.35.2 Enhance
Enhance in Single and Dual radar display Select the Radar Control icon.
NOTE: For Enhance to be operational in ECDIS mode, Radar

Interlay must be enabled in optional features (see radar interlay).
With the cursor placed over the Enhance button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Normal
Enhance 1 Enhance 2
Video
Switches Applies 1st Applies 2nd

video stage of stage of
enhance video video
OFF. enhance. enhance.
Normal Video: Enhance is switched OFF.

Enhance 1: Applies target stretch in both range and azimuth.
Enhance 2: Applies further target stretch in range and azimuth.
WARNING:
The video enhance enlarges not only small targets but also clutter returns
from the sea surface, rain and radar interference.
For this reason, ensure these types of interference have been sufficiently
suppressed before activating the video enhance.
In excessive sea clutter or precipitation, the use of enhanced video may

reduce target visibility.
Page 171 of 406

6.35.3 Gain, Sea and Rain filters
Gain/ sea/ rain filters Select the Radar Control icon.

in Single and Dual radar display
NOTE: For the Gain, Sea & Rain filters to be operational in ECDIS
mode, Radar Interlay must be enabled in optional features (see
radar interlay).
Gain control
The Gain control sets the threshold of the radar signals shown on the screen. With the
cursor placed over the Gain slider, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Adjust Gain
Adjusts the
Gain as
required.
Keeping the Adjust Gain button pressed, use the cursor to adjust the gain to the desired
level.
Notes on Gain control:
 For a correct Gain setting with the correlator switched OFF, the control should be
adjusted until an even ‘speckled’ background is just visible on the screen, i.e. the gain is
set to the threshold of receiver noise.
 In conditions of high precipitation (rain, hail or snow) a reduction of the Gain level reduces
clutter and produces a clearer picture.
WARNING:
If the gain is set too low, weak echoes will not be visible. Equally, if the
level is set too high there will be too much background noise and strong
targets may not be clear due to the poor contrast between the target
echoes and the background noise.
Page 172 of 406

Sea Clutter
The Sea anti-clutter control reduces sea clutter returns. The control has the maximum effect
at zero range diminishing over time (range) until no reduction of signals occur at the edge of
the Radar Operational Area. Optimum settings of the control are some clutter is seen but is
sufficiently suppressed so that small targets are easily identified.
With the cursor placed over the Sea clutter slider, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Adjust Sea
Adjusts the
Sea Filter as
required.
With the Adjust Sea button pressed, use the cursor to adjust the sea to the desired level.
Manual, reset & automatic sea
With the cursor placed over the Sea clutter button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Automatic
Manual Sea Reset Sea
Sea
Selects
automatic
Selects
sea allowing
manual Resets the
the system to
control of sea clutter
automatically
sea anti- to zero
apply the
clutter
anti-clutter
level
Sea filter set to Auto
Notes on Sea anti-clutter control:

 In most cases adjust the Sea clutter control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, with a little
still visible windward. Increasing the Sea anti-clutter progressively reduces the clutter whilst
retaining targets. Smaller targets may have a similar or lower signal than clutter signals; the
visibility of these targets can be enhanced using the Scan to Scan correlation function.
 When the radar is operating in conditions of simultaneous precipitation and sea clutter there will be
a further degradation in performance, and the gain, sea and rain anti-clutter controls will need to
be set to optimise the radar picture.
 If automatic Sea is selected this resets to manual Sea at a value of zero.
 When switching from Automatic back to Manual Sea, the control reverts to the last manual setting
used before switching to auto.
CAUTION
If the Sea anti-clutter is set too low, targets may be obscured. Equally, if the Sea
anti-clutter is set too high, both targets and sea clutter may be obscured.
Page 173 of 406

Rain Clutter
The Rain anti-clutter control reduces clutter from rain, snow and hail. The rain anti-clutter
control setting should be adjusted to preserve small targets.
The Rain control should be adjusted so that clutter from precipitation is reduced, thus
improving radar image discrimination. Note that land masses will be thinned as the rain anti-
clutter control is increased.
With the cursor placed over the Rain clutter slider, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Adjust Rain
Adjusts the
Rain Filter
as required.
With the Adjust Rain button pressed, use the cursor to adjust the sea to the desired level.
Manual, reset & automatic Rain
With the cursor placed over the Sea clutter button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Automatic
Manual Rain Reset Rain
Rain
Selects
automatic
Selects rain allowing
Resets the
manual the system to
rain clutter
control of automatically
to zero
rain filter apply the
anti-clutter
level
Rain filter set to Auto
Notes on Rain filter
 Useful techniques that can be used in conjunction with the rain clutter to help target
detection are:
Reduction of gain, use of S-Band frequency radar sensor or under pulsing the radar
(short pulse is effective at reducing rain signals).
 When switching from automatic to manual rain, the control reverts to the last manual
setting used before switching to auto.
NOTE: When the radar is operating in conditions of simultaneous precipitation

and sea clutter there will be a further degradation in performance, and the gain,
sea anti-clutter and rain anti-clutter controls will need to be set to optimise the
radar picture.
Page 174 of 406

6.35.4 Interference Rejection and Correlation
Correlation in Single and Dual radar display Select the Radar Control icon.
Note: When the option ETD mode is enabled, the correlator button is removed and
correlation is not available:
ETD OFF ETD ON

(Correlation available) (Correlation NOT available)
Video correlation is used to reduce radar interference and to reduce clutter. It is

recommended that the anti-clutter controls are set first to reduce clutter as far as possible
whilst maintaining target detection.
Clicking on the Correlator button produces the following drop down box.
Left Middle Right
Set
Correlator
Opens a
drop down
list where
Correlator
levels can
be selected.
Use the drop down list to select the required level of correlation. The button name will
change to reflect the level selected.
Page 175 of 406

Correlation modes
No Correlation: The radar image is not processed by the correlator and the presented radar
image intensity depends on the signal strength. Small targets are likely to be presented at a
similar level to clutter
Int. Rejection ON: Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipbourne
radar operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as irregular patterns or
in the form of usually curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the centre to the edge of
the picture. Interference rejection can reduce this type of interference.
In interference rejection, consecutive transmissions are compared and only signals present
on both transmissions are correlated and shown on the screen. Interference from other
radars is suppressed and receiver noise reduced. Int. Rejection ON is the switch on default
correlation mode.
Scan/Scan: Scan to scan correlation may be applied to reduce sea and precipitation clutter.
Most sea clutter spikes will be suppressed, however, any spikes that correlate over several
scans may still be shown. Correlation will have the following effects:
Stable targets will correlate over several scans and after averaging will be retained and
displayed at a high intensity.
Clutter is of a random nature and will not correlate to the same level. Thus when displayed it
will be shown at a lower intensity.
As correlation is ground stabilised and averaged, zero speed targets will be visible at a
higher intensity, assuming they are detected on the majority of scans.
Two levels of Scan to scan correlation can be selected:
Scan/Scan 2: Correlates the last 2 scans of radar data.

Scan/Scan 3: Correlates the last 3 scans of radar data.
NOTE: Scan-scan correlation requires a ground stabilisation input.
WARNING
Fast moving targets may not fully correlate, particularly on the

lower range scales. Correlation should therefore be applied on
longer range scales, typically on or above 3 nm range scale.
A radar sensor using a faster rotating antenna can assist in target

detection under these conditions.
If correlation is used on short pulse and/or a low range scale, small

targets with a fast relative speed may not correlate.
Page 176 of 406

Enhanced Correlator: The Correlation Enhance function uses long time constant
correlation techniques to detect fixed or moving targets in addition to scan to scan 3 mode
Fixed target: Fixed targets such as land, buoys, slow moving and stationary targets
are shown in a different colour to the moving targets. Fixed Targets
have a variable gain level which is controlled using the ‘Fixed Tgt’
slider.
Moving target: This presents fast moving and transient information which is displayed
in a different colour to fixed targets. The gain level of this layer is
controlled using the ‘Moving Tgt’ slider.
The colours of fixed and moving targets can be adjusted; see Video Settings for additional
information.
This function is useful for showing small fixed targets, e.g. buoys that are obscured by
waves, atmospheric conditions on some scans and for identifying targets that do not
correlate using scan-to-scan correlation.
Caution: The Correlation Enhance function requires a ground stabilisation

input or a stationary platform. It may take up to 2 minutes after changing
range for the full effect of the technique to be visible to the user.
Page 177 of 406

6.35.5 Radar Interswitch Unit
NOTE: To access the radar interswitch in ECDIS mode, Radar

Interlay must be enabled in optional features (see radar interlay).
Overview:
The Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU) allows up to 6 transmitters and 6 radar displays to be
connected allowing each individual display to select and control any of the transmitters
connected. Displays can be master or slave to any of the sensors connected to the system.
Interswitch Control:
The Kelvin Hughes MDP-A12 interswitch unit is fully controlled from the display and has no
user configuration on the unit.
Details on selecting transceivers can be found in the following sections:
0: Transceiver selection in standby

6.35.13: Transceiver selection when running Radar or ECDIS modes
Interswitch ON/ OFF switch
The main power switch for the MDP-A12 radar interswitch unit is located on the base of the
unit.
For normal operation, the switch should be left in the ON position.
Caution: The ON/ OFF switch is illuminated regardless of the switch

position. It should not be assumed that if the switch is illuminated that the
radar interswitch unit is switched ON.
Page 178 of 406

Interswitch bypass.
In the event of a radar interswitch unit fault or the RIU being switched OFF, the system
automatically reverts to BYPASS mode where all displays and transmitters connected to the
system revert to the following default conditions:
 Display 1 is directly connected to Transceiver 1

In a system where there are more Transceivers than displays some transceivers will not be
available for use if the RIU is not operational. For example, in a system with two displays
and three transceivers:
 Transceiver 1 is directly connected to Display 1

 Transceiver 2 is directly connected to Display 2
 Transceiver 3 is not accessible.
When the system is in Bypass mode, the standby screen will show the transceiver
connected to the display: The following example assumes the screen shown is from display
number 2.
Standby screen:
Radar interswitch operational
Display 2 currently Master of

transceiver 1
Standby screen:
RIU in Bypass mode
Display 2 in bypass mode directly

connected to transceiver 2
Page 179 of 406

When the system is running single/ dual radar modes or is in ECDIS mode using the optional
radar interlay, the following alarms are triggered when the radar interswitch enters bypass
mode:
Alarm notifying that the radar interswitch unit (RIU)

has entered bypass mode.
Radar Interswitch functions are not available.
The display will be connected as Master to the default

transceiver.
Alarm notifying that the radar interswitch unit (RIU)

has recovered from bypass mode.
Radar Interswitch functions are available.
Interswitch precautions
WARNING: Mains voltages are present within the radar interswitch unit.
All AC supplies must be fully isolated prior to opening the unit.
CAUTION: There are no user configurable functions within the radar

interswitch unit.
Service and/ or configuration of the radar interswitch unit must only be
carried out by a suitably trained and authorised engineer.
Page 180 of 406

6.35.6 Master/ Slave
The following examples show the various screen areas and modes where a transceiver can
be selected as Master or Slave.
Left Middle Right
Transceiver selection Select Radar Go to

Single & Dual radar Sensor Standby
Opens the
radar Returns to
Sensor the Standby No Function
Selection screen
panel
Transceiver selection
ECDIS mode
Left Middle Right
Master Slave
Selects the Selects the

transceiver No function transceiver
as Master as Slave
Standby Screen/ Radar Sensor Selection…
Page 181 of 406

Master/ Slave notes:
Note 1: In Slave mode, the tune, pulse length, performance monitor and Mute
functions are NOT available.
Note 2: If the system has a single transceiver and no interswitch connected, the Slave
button does not appear.
Note 3: When the Radar is set as Slave to a transceiver, the radar image is limited to
the range set on the Master Display. No radar data is shown outside the limit,
although AIS data will be shown.
Master Display at low range Slave display at higher range

with radar image limited
Note 4: In the scenario where displays 1 and 2 are set as Master, if display 2 Masters
Tranciever1, display 1 automatically becomes a Slave of Tranciever1:
Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2 Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2
Display 2
selects
Transceiver 1
as
Display 1 Display 2 MASTER Display 1 Display 2
MASTER MASTER SLAVE MASTER
Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2 Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2
Page 182 of 406

6.35.7 Mute
Mute in Single and Dual radar display Select the Radar Control icon.
NOTE: For MUTE to be operational in ECDIS mode, Radar Interlay

must be enabled in optional features (see radar interlay).
Note: The Mute button is only available when the radar sensor is selected as Master.
With the cursor placed over the Mute button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Mute Sector Mute Sector

ON/ OFF Edit/ Fix
Switches Allows a
the mute mute sector
No function
sector On / to be created
Off and adjusted
When the mute sector is switched ON, the mute sector shows as a shaded wedge on
screen.
Mute sector ON Mute sector Edit/ fix ON Mute sector Edit/ fix ON
Zone Enabled Zone Disabled
Page 183 of 406

Mute sector editing
With the Mute sector switched ON, place the cursor over the Mute button and select Mute
sector edit/ fix. The outline of the mute sector will change from a solid to a dashed line.
When the cursor is positioned over the edge of a Mute sector, the cursor will change from a
cross hair to a square with the following options:
Left Middle Right
Select Enable Zone/

Acquire
Zone Disable Zone
Selects the
Enables or
edge of the See target
disables the
Mute sector to tracking
Mute sector.
be adjusted.
Use the trackerball to drag the edge of the

mute sector to the desired position.
Set
Acquire Remove Zone
Zone
Accepts the
adjusted See target Disables the
position of the tracking Mute sector
Mute sector
NOTE: Only one mute sector is permitted per transceiver.

Mute sectors must be individually configured for each transceiver in use.
Page 184 of 406

6.35.8 Performance Monitor
Performance monitor in Select the Radar Control icon.

The efficiency of the magnetron in a transceiver can be checked using the performance
monitor (PM) function.
There are two types of optional performance monitor that can be fitted to both X and S band
magnetron based transceivers:
Transmission Monitor: A monitor arm fitted to the outer case of the transceiver turning
mechanism/ gearbox.
Receiver Monitor: A resonant cavity fitted within the transceiver or gearbox.
When should performance monitor reading be taken?
Performance monitor checks should be carried out in line with IMO regulations or ship
specific requirements/ instructions.
WARNING
Performance monitor tests obscure radar returns. Performance
monitor tests should only be carried out when the radar is not
required for safe navigation.
NOTE
The Performance monitor button is not available when:
 A SharpEyeTM transceiver is selected
 The selected transceiver is Slave not master
Page 185 of 406

Switching ON the performance monitor
With the cursor placed over the PM button, the following option is available.
Left Middle Right
Performance
Monitor
Switches the
Performance
monitor ON/
OFF
Dark blue button Light blue button

Red text White text
Performance monitor ON Performance monitor OFF
NOTE: Where the transceiver is located on the bridge, a noise may be briefly
heard from inside the transceiver as the performance monitor is switched ON &
OFF.
The noise is the receiver cavity relays engaging and is completely normal.
When PM mode is enabled, the system automatically selects long Pulse (LP).
Measuring receiver performance (X and S band systems)
With the PM switched on, select the Receiver performance monitor ON

3.0NM range and switch on one of the
VRM positioned at the edge of the sun
two variable range markers (VRM).
Where the optional receiver cavity is

fitted, a circle of noise or SUN will be
seen on the screen.
Place the VRM at the edge of this and

make a note of the range.
NOTE: A mute sector will be present

in the noise circle. This is normal.
Once the readings have been taken,

switch OFF the performance monitor
by pressing the PM button
Example of a performance monitor receiver SUN from a radar

screen. Where viewed on an ECDIS using radar interlay, the
results will be the same.
Page 186 of 406

Measuring transceiver performance on X band systems
With the PM switched on, select the

Receiver performance monitor ON
12NM range and switch on one of the
two variable range markers (VRM). VRM positioned at the edge of the plume
Where the optional transceiver

performance monitor arm is fitted, a
plume of noise will be seen on screen.
Place the VRM at the furthest edge of

the plume and make a note of the
range reading. The bearing and arc of
the plume may vary and is not critical.
NOTE: A mute sector will be present

on screen. This is normal.
Once the readings have been taken,

switch OFF the performance monitor
Example of a performance monitor plume from a radar
by pressing the PM button. screen. Where viewed on an ECDIS using radar interlay,
the results will be the same
Measuring transceiver performance on S band systems
With the PM switched on, select the 12NM range and switch on one of the two variable
range markers (VRM).
Where the optional transceiver performance monitor arm is fitted, five ‘fingers’ of noise will
be seen inside the mute sector that is activated on screen.
Place the VRM at the furthest edge of the plume and make a note of the range reading.
Measuring transceiver performance on SharpEyeTM systems
SharpEyeTM does not use conventional magnetron technology. There are no user accessible
performance monitor functions on SharpEyeTM systems.
The SharpEyeTM constantly monitors the transceiver and receiver performance and will
automatically alert the user to any performance related issues.
Page 187 of 406

How do I use the performance monitor figures?
For both transmission and receiver systems, regular measurements must be taken.
When the values being recorded reach 80% of the original installation or commissioning
values; a service intervention will be required.
In most cases reduced PM readings are an indication that the magnetron may have reached
the end of its serviceable life.
How do I know if I have a performance monitor fitted?
Performance monitor: If there is an ‘arm’ protruding

from the transceiver/ gearbox in question, then the
transceiver performance monitor arm is fitted.
The drawing shows a Kelvin Hughes MK5 transceiver

with the arm showing on the left hand side.
Receiver cavity: Switch on the PM function!
If a receiver monitor is fitted you will see a sun on screen indicating the cavity is fitted.
If you are unsure if the system is fitted with performance monitoring equipment, please
contact Kelvin Hughes who can advise if the system has the feature fitted.
WARNING:
The performance monitor cavity is located within the transceiver which
contains lethal voltages.
There are no user adjustable parts in or on the receiver cavity.
Page 188 of 406

6.35.9 Pulse length
Pulse length in Single and Dual radar display Select the Radar Control icon.
NOTE: The Pulse length button is not available when:

 The selected transceiver is Slave not Master
For conventional magnetron radars, pulse selection allows the user to select a shorter or
longer pulse length than that provided by default for the selected range scale.
With the cursor placed over the Pulse button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Down Normal Up
Decreases Reset to the Increases

the pulse default pulse the pulse
length length length
The default pulse lengths are:

Short Pulse (SP): 0.125 NM to 1.5 NM ranges (allowed up to 12 NM)
Medium Pulse (MP): 3.0 NM to 24 NM ranges (allowed 0.75 NM to 48 NM)
Long Pulse (LP): 48 NM and 96 NM ranges (allowed 3 NM to 96 NM)
When the pulse length is under (down) or over (up) pulsed, the pulse length button changes
colour to a Magenta background.
Page 189 of 406

6.35.10 Radar Interlay (ECIDS ONLY)
NOTE: For Radar Interlay to be operational in ECDIS mode, Radar

Interlay must be enabled in optional features.
Radar Control icon

If Radar Interlay is NOT enabled, the Radar
Control icon remains greyed out and radar
control cannot be selected.
Radar Control Radar Control

Enabled Disabled
Green icon Grey icon
Blue background Grey background
Left Middle Right
Radar ON Radar OFF
Switches
Switches the
the radar
radar interlay
interlay
function OFF
function ON
Page 190 of 406

6.35.11 Range selection
Range selection in single radar display To change range in ECDIS mode, use the
scale button
Range selection in PPI tab of dual display

Left Middle Right
Range selection in ETD tab of dual display

See section 6.5, Chart scale and position
for additional details on how to adjust the
scale in ECDIS mode.
In radar modes only, with the cursor placed over the Range button, the following options
are available:
Left Middle Right
Range Rings Range

DOWN ON/OFF UP

Switches
next next
range rings
available available
ON or OFF
lower range higher range
The following ranges and range ring spacing can be selected:

Short pulse
Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 3.0
Range rings (NM) 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25
Medium pulse
Range (NM) 6.0 12 24
Range rings (NM) 1.0 2.0 4.0
Long pulse
Note: Range rings are not
Range (NM) 48 96 available in ETD mode.
Range rings (NM) 8.0 12
Page 191 of 406

6.35.12 Transceiver Ready/ Not ready
The status of each transmitter is shown on the Standby screen and within the Radar
Sensor Selection.
NOT READY (Red square)
The transmitter is warming up.
The warm up period should last a maximum of:

 90 seconds for X band transceivers
 180 seconds for S band transceivers
 SharpEye sensors do not require a warm-up period and will
immediately show READY at switch on.
If the transceiver is still showing NOT READY after the warm up period,
there may be a problem (see section 14).
NOT READY but displaying countdown timer (red square)
Some transmitters give a countdown to when the transceiver will be

ready.
When the countdown reaches zero, the symbol will change from Not
ready to Ready.
READY (Green square)
The transceiver is ready to transmit.
READY but displaying a green flashing number
This shows that the transceiver is READY but is currently mastered by

another display.
The flashing green number indicates the number of the display that is
controlling the transmitter.
If there is NO NUMBER then the display in use is set to Master of the

transceiver.
Page 192 of 406

Transceiver selection in standby
The process for selecting a transceiver from the standby screen is the same regardless of
which operation mode is to be used (radar, ECDIS etc).
NOTE: ECDIS systems. In a standalone ECDIS system, transceiver

selection is only possible if a radar mode or the ECDIS radar overlay has
been enabled in optional features
Standalone system Interswitched system

(no interswitch) (example shows 3 radars connected)
The transmitter is directly connected to the With the cursor over the required
display. transceiver, the following options
become available:
There is no need to select a transmitter.
Left Middle Right
You cannot select the display as a Slave
Master Slave
as it is the only sensor connected to the
display.
The display will always be Master. transmitter No function transmitter
as MASTER as SLAVE
The selected Transceiver can now be placed in Run by

selecting any of the enabled operational modes in the Go
to Run menu.
Page 193 of 406

6.35.13 Transceiver selection when running Radar or ECDIS modes
It is not necessary to return to the standby screen to select a different transceiver.
To change to a different transceiver in NOTE: Transceiver selection is only

single or dual radar modes: available in ECDIS mode when Radar
interlay is enabled as an optional feaure
Place the cursor over the currently and the Radar button is switched ON
selected transceiver which is shown at the
top left side of the PPI: To change to a different transceiver:
Select the Radar Control icon and
place the cursor over the currently
selected transceiver.
The cursor tooltip will change to show the following options
Left Middle Right
Select Radar Go to
Sensor Standby
Opens the
Returns to
radar sensor
the Standby No Function
selection
screen
panel
Master or Slave the desired

transceiver and then press the red
cross X to close the page.
The selected transceiver will display

on screen.
Page 194 of 406

6.35.14 SART detection using manual tune
The Manual Tune feature is very useful for distinguishing between radar returns and Search
and Rescue Transceiver (SART) transmissions. A de-tuned receiver system will still receive
SART transmissions even though its own transceiver’s radar returns are reduced, thereby
making SART responses more visible.
To detect SART signals, select Manual Tune and detune the receiver system to show the
minimum number of target returns from the radar. Retune the receiver system once SART
detection has been completed, either manually, or by selecting Automatic Tune.
Page 195 of 406

6.35.15 Tune indicator
Tune bar in Single and Dual radar display Select the Radar Control icon.
NOTE: The Tune button is not available when:

 The selected transceiver is Slave not master
With the cursor placed over the Tune button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Automatic
Manual Tune
Tune
The system
Manually
automatically
adjust the No Function
tunes the
tune
transceiver
Manual Tune Automatic Tune
When manual tune is selected, the tune Selecting Automatic tune uses the AFC
level can be manually adjusted. Adjust function and is recommended for normal
tune operation.
Tune
indicator
The tune bar is automatically set for the
Left Middle Right strongest signal.
Adjust TUNE
Adjust the
Tune to
obtain
strongest
returns
Keeping the Adjust Tune button

pressed, use the cursor to adjust the
tune to the desired level.
The tune bar indicator is located below
the slider and shows the tune level.
Page 196 of 406

6.35.16 Trails
Trails in Single and Dual radar MAIN PPI Select the Radar Control icon.
Trails in Dual display PPI tab
With the cursor placed over the Trails button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Trails True/ Trails ON/

Reset Trails
Relative OFF
Toggles Clears both

Toggles the
between the screen
trails ON and
True and and the
OFF
Relative memory of
Trails all trails
To adjust the trails length, place the cursor on the trails length slider and keeping the button
pressed, use the cursor to adjust to the desired length.
Left Middle Right
Adjust trail
length
Adjust trails
from zero to
30 minutes
In RADAR MODE ONLY, the Relative/ True motion box shows which trails mode has been
selected as shown below:
 Relative Motion and True trails: RM(T)

 Relative motion and Relative trails: RM(R)
 Relative motion and trails OFF: RM
 True Motion and True trails: TM(T)
 True motion and Relative trails: TM(R) Example of Relative motion true trails
 True motion and trails OFF: TM indication
Page 197 of 406

Notes on trails
 Trails data is only built up on when a radar mode or ECDIS radar overlay is started from
standby; initially a full trails history is not available.
 When trails are switched OFF, data is removed from the screen but it is retained in
memory. When trails are switched back on, any available historical trails data is
displayed.
 When trails are turned off, the trails length slider is not displayed
Trails ON Trails OFF
 Trails history is lost when:

• Changing between Radar or ECDIS modes.
• The radar interlay is switched OFF/ ON.
• The display is placed in standby or is switched off
 Stationary radar targets do not produce true trails when ground stabilisation is applied.
i.e. land would not have trails when ground stabilisation is selected.
 If Sea stabilisation is selected, stationary targets may have a true trail due to the
difference between ground and water velocity i.e. drift.
Page 198 of 406

6.36 Raster / ARCS charts
Raster, ARCS or BSB charts cannot be loaded or displayed on the Kelvin Hughes wide
screen ECDIS/ chart radar systems running ZM-2144 software.
Raster charts cannot be loaded.
Page 199 of 406

6.37 Route Editing (Edit Selected Route)
NOTE: This function is NOT available in radar modes.
A route can be temporarily edited without the need to enter route planning mode. The editing
functions include editing, addition and amending of waypoints and channel widths and safety
checking of the edited sections of the route.
The Edit Selected Route function is designed to be used where an unexpected deviation or
temporary change is quickly required on a route.
Permanent changes to a route must be carried out in route planning.
The Edit Selected Route button is located in Extended Route data icon, Route settings /
General tab.
NOTE: The Edit Select Route button is only available when a main route
is loaded. If no route is loaded, the Edit Select Route button is NOT
DISPLAYED.
Select the Extended Route Data icon.

Left Middle Right
Select Main Route De-select

Route settings Route
Select and Opens route De-selects the

load a route settings current route
Edit Selected Route in the General Tab
Page 200 of 406

6.37.1 Edit selected Route
The edit selected route function is designed to be used where an unexpected deviation or
temporary change is quickly required on a route.
Note: Once edited and saved in ECDIS mode, edited routes can be loaded in radar and
ECDIS modes but cannot be viewed or re-edited in route planning.
All permanent changes to a route must be carried out in route planning mode.
With a main route loaded (see section 6.38.1; Selecting and loading routes) and the cursor
placed over the Edit Selected Route button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

Edit
Discard Accept
Selected
Changes changes
Route
Discards/
Allows
deletes any Accepts all
Editing of
changes to changes to
the Main
the Main the Main route
route
route
When the Edit selected route button is pressed the

following changes occur:
 The Alternative route button is removed.

 The Check Route Edits button is displayed.
The loaded route is now available for editing
If the Check Route Edits button is not available, a route

has not been loaded.
Check Route Edits button

displayed.
Route colours
The main and alternative routes as shown in different colours:

• Primary (main) routes are displayed on screen in Red
• Alternative routes are displayed on screen in Orange
The editing, saving and checking of routes is detailed in the next section
Page 201 of 406

6.37.2 Editing waypoint(s)
With Edit selected route selected, waypoints

on the main route can be moved, added and
renamed.
With the cursor over the required waypoint, the

system will display information about the
waypoint:
Cursor placed over a waypoint in a Main route
With cursor placed over a waypoint, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

Left Middle Right
Start Drag Change WP
WP Details Accept
Undo Undo
Position
waypoint waypoint Accepts the
beneath the beneath the Deletes the Deletes the
new position
cursor to be cursor and last change last change
for the
edited opens an made made
waypoint
editing
dialogue box
for editing
waypoint
details.
OR
Select a waypoint and click on the Start Drag WP button. Move the waypoint to the desired
position and click Accept Position to fix the waypoint at the desired position.
Errors in position can be correct by clicking the middle or right button marked as Undo.
Page 202 of 406

6.37.3 Adding Waypoint(s) to a route
With cursor placed on the route between a waypoint, a new waypoint can be added.
With the cursor placed on the route in-between waypoints, the following options are
available.
Accept
Insert WP Set Centre Undo Undo
Position
Selects the Fixes the

route Deletes the Deletes the
See position of
beneath the last change last change
Set Centre the new
cursor made made
waypoint
position
OR
Select a point on the route between waypoints and click on the Insert WP button, a new
waypoint is created. Move the waypoint to the desired position and click Accept Position to
fix the waypoint at the desired position.
Errors in position can be correct by clicking the middle or right button marked as Undo.
Page 203 of 406

6.37.4 Adjusting Channel widths on a route
With cursor placed over a channel width on a leg of the route, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right

Left Middle Right
Start Drag
Set Centre Accept
Edge Undo Undo
Changes
Selects the
channel See Fixes the
Deletes the Deletes the
beneath the Set Centre new
last change last change
cursor Channel
made made
width
OR
Select a channel width between waypoints on the route and click on the Start Drag Edge
button. Move the channel width to the desired position and click Accept Changes to fix the
channel width at the desired position.
Errors can be correct by clicking the middle or right button marked as Undo.
Page 204 of 406

6.37.5 Change Waypoint details on a route
With cursor placed over a waypoint, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

Change
Start Drag
Waypoint
Waypoint
Details
Selects the
Selects the waypoint
waypoint beneath the
beneath the cursor and
cursor to be opens the
edited Edit route
details box.
Cursor placed over a waypoint in a Main route
When Change Waypoint Details is pressed the following box opens where details on the
selected waypoint can be amended and changed.
WP name and position: Changes are

made using the Keyboard. To adjust
numeric values such as the position, place
the cursor over each number to be
adjusted. Press and hold the left button and
the numbers will display arrows above and
below them. Roll the tracker ball to adjust
the required value.
Turn Type: Selected between Turn radius

or Rate of turn.
Turn radius, design speed and Channel

width: Enter the desired values.
Delete the WP: Deletes the selected

waypoint.
Accept changes: Accepts all changes

made in the Edit Route Details dialogue
box.
Abandon changes: To exit the dialogue box and abandon changes to the selected waypoint
press the X at the top right of the Edit Route Details Dialogue box.
Page 205 of 406

6.37.6 Accept or Discard changes in Edit Selected Route
When editing of a route is complete, changes must be saved (accepted) or discarded

(deleted).
Note: Once saved, edited routes can be loaded in radar and ECDIS modes but cannot be
viewed or re-edited in route planning.
All permanent changes to a route must be carried out in route planning mode.
With the cursor placed over the Edit Selected Route button, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
Edit Selected Discard Accept

Route Changes changes
Deletes all Saves all

Allows
changes changes
Editing of the
made to the made to the
Main route
route route
Loading an edited version of a route
(See section 6.38.3; Loading edited version of a route).
Page 206 of 406

6.37.7 Route checking (Check Route Edits)
When Edit Selected Route has been selected, the Check Route Edits button becomes
available.
Left Middle Right
Check Route Clear Check

Edits Results
Clears the
chart of any
Safety
safety check
check the
warnings
route No Function
that appear
currently
when Check
being edited
Route Edits
is used.
When Check Route Edits is pressed the system analyses the route and advises of any
potential dangers found on the edited section of the route using the chart data loaded.
Unedited sections of the route ARE NOT CHECKED
Example of warning dialogue displayed during Check Route Edits
WARNING: The Check Route Edits only safety checks the edit sections
of the route.
This is not a Full safety check and only uses the safety objects selected in
the safety check function found in route planning.
Un-edited sections of the route ARE NOT SAFETY CHECKED.
WARNING: For correct safety checking of routes, chart data must be up

to date and the vessel’s depth and safety contours correctly set.
Page 207 of 406

Depth
When Check Route Edits is selected, any depth issues identified on the edited section of
the route are shown as hatched areas within the route (see below). Small squares are
shown within the hatched area and placing the cursor on these squares shows the depth
range as specified by the chart data in use.
Depth area warning with marker squares Cursor placed over marker squares
For safety checking of depth to display correctly, all chart data must be up to date and the
vessel’s depth and safety contours correctly set. Un-edited sections of the route ARE NOT
CHECKED
Obstructions
When Check Route Edits is selected, any obstructions identified on the edited section of
the route are shown as ‘call-outs’.
Obstructions showing on a route after running Check Route Edit
Fairway warning showing on a route after running Check Route Edit
For safety checking of objects to display correctly, chart data must be up to date. Un-edited
sections of the route ARE NOT CHECKED
Page 208 of 406

Clear Check Edits
Left Middle Right
Check Route Clear Check

Edits Results
Clears the
chart of any
Safety check safety check
the route warnings
No Function
currently that appear
being edited when Check
Route Edits
is used.
Pressing Clear check Results removes all depth and object warnings generated by the
Check Route Edits function.
This makes the chart symbols below the warnings easier to view as Clear Check Results
clears the screen of the warnings.
Route showing results of Check route edits The same route after Clear Check results is pressed
Page 209 of 406

6.37.8 Deleting routes created in Edit Selected Route
Edited versions of a route can be deleted from the load route menu. Follow the instructions
for loading a route (see section 6.38.3)
With the cursor placed over the Delete Edited Versions button, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
Delete ALL Delete Oldest

Edits Edit
Deletes all Deletes the

edits leaving oldest edited
the original No Function version of
planned the selected
route route
NOTE: When all edited versions of the route are deleted, the ‘Select edited version to load’ dialogue does not
appear when re-loading the route.
6.37.9 Exit Route settings
To exit the dialogue box, click on X at the top right of Route

Setting.
Page 210 of 406

6.37.10 Changing menus whilst edit selected route is open
If you exit or close the route settings menu or change to another menu/ icon without saving
changes to the route being edited, the route is still available for editing.
Route editing in Edit Selected Route Nav data icon selected but route is still available
for editing
If you have navigated away from Edit selected route, to save changes or carry out safety
checking you must return to the Edit Selected Route menu.
If you load a new route or switch from Main to Alternative route whilst still editing a
route, the following warning will be presented:
Left Middle Right
Yes No Cancel
Cancels the
Changes Changes load route
to the to the function.
route route Changes to
being being the route
edited are edited are being
be saved lost edited are
not lost
Page 211 of 406

6.38 Route Management
6.38.1 Route selection, loading and de-selection
Routes in Single radar display Select the Extended Route Data icon.
Routes TAB in Dual radar display
NOTE: The selection, loading and de-selection of routes is same process for Single, dual
radar, Chart radar and ECDIS modes.
Page 212 of 406

6.38.2 Select Main Route
With the cursor placed over the Route button the following options are available.
Single radar display Dual radar display ECDIS mode
Left Middle Right

De-selects the
Select and Opens route route that is
load a route settings currently
loaded
Primary
Route
(Red
graphic)
loaded in
radar
modes
Primary
Route
(red
graphic)
loaded in
ECDIS
When a route is loaded, the route name is displayed and route monitoring information is
shown
Route loaded in Single radar Route loaded in Dual radar Route loaded in ECDIS
Page 213 of 406

6.38.3 Loading edited version of a route
Notes on Edited routes
For full details see section 6.37 (Edit Selected Route)
When loading a route that has been edited using the Edit Selected Route function, a
dialogue is presented that allows the selection of either the edited version(s) of a route or the
original version created in route planning.
The Edit Selected Route function is designed to be used for route editing where an
unexpected deviation or temporary change is quickly required on a route.
Permanent changes to a route must be carried out in route planning.
NOTE: The Edit Selected Route button is only available in ECDIS

mode. Routes cannot be edited in Radar modes.
Routes edited using the Edit Selected Route function can be loaded in radar and ECDIS
modes but cannot be viewed or re-edited in route planning.
Loading Routes changed using the Edit Selected Route function
Select a route; where an edited version of the route is available the following option
becomes available:
Example:
A route called Test route 1 has been selected.
A drop down list and Delete Edited Version button are now
presented.
In the drop down list:

 Original Planned is original route created using route planning.
 Two additional routes listed are the versions created using Edit
Selected Route and are shown with the time and date that
they were edited and saved.
Select the desired version of the route and it will be displayed on

screen
Page 214 of 406

Deleting routes created in Edit Selected Route
Edited version of a route can be deleted as follows:
With the cursor placed over the Delete Edited Versions button, the following options are
available:
Left Middle Right
Delete ALL Delete Oldest

Edits Edit
Deletes all Deletes the

edits leaving oldest edited
the original No Function version of
planned the selected
route route
NOTE: When all edited versions of the route are deleted, the ‘Select edited version to load’ dialogue does not
appear when re-loading the route.
Page 215 of 406

6.38.4 Route Settings
Left Middle Right


When Route Settings is selected, three tabs become available: Display, General and
Alarms tabs; each tab is covered in the following pages.
Route Settings DISPLAY tab
The Display tab is used to set the level of route features shown on screen.
Selecting (Ticked = ON) or Deselecting (Not ticked = OFF) any features in route settings
removes the selected item from the screen. Deselecting a feature does not suspend the
activity, for example: If you deselect Route the route is no longer shown on the screen but
all other route monitoring functions continue.
Distance to Run
When selected, Distance to run places
markers in nautical Miles on the approach to
the next waypoint in a route.
The distance between marks can be

adjusted between 0.1 to 50 nautical miles.
When the cursor is placed over the numeric

values, they can be adjusted by rolling the
trackerball up or down as required.
Page 216 of 406

Route Settings GENERAL tab
The General tab is used to set auto-loading of NMEA routes and route editing.
When Auto Load NMEA Routes is selected,

routes from another ECDIS or GPS connected to
the system will be automatically loaded on screen.
Alternative Route and Edit Selected Route
Radar modes:
The Alternative Route and Edit Selected Route buttons are
NOT available in Radar modes.
Radar
Route settings GENERAL
tab
ECDIS mode:
For ECDIS mode see the following sections:
 Alternative Route: see section 6.38.6

 Edit Selected Route: see section 6.37
ECDIS
Route settings GENERAL
tab
Page 217 of 406

Route Settings ALARM tab
Note: This section is currently under construction
If you have a specific question regarding the Route Settings Alarm tab please
contact Kelvin Hughes using the details found in the Contacting Kelvin Hughes
section.
Page 218 of 406

6.38.5 De-Select route
Left Middle Right

De-selects
Select and Opens route the route that
load a route settings is currently
loaded
Selecting De-Select Route switches OFF the main route.
All associated Route monitoring and Critical alarms are suspended.
Page 219 of 406

6.38.6 Alternative route
NOTE: This function is NOT available in radar mode.

Left Middle Right


Select the General tab
Route settings General Tab
In ECDIS mode only, the Alternative routes button allows the loading, swapping and de-
selection of routes.
Route colours
The main and alternative routes as shown in different colours:

• Alternative routes are displayed on screen in Orange
• Primary (main) routes are displayed on screen in Red
Page 220 of 406

6.38.7 Loading an alternative route
With the cursor placed over the Alternative route button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Select Alt Switch De-select Alt

Route routes Route
De-selects the
Select and Switches the
alternative
load an Main and
route that is
alternative Alternative
currently
route route
loaded
Main Route
Alternative Route
The selected Alternative route is shown on screen in orange.
6.38.8 Switching to an alternative route

Middle Right
Left

Route routes Route
Switches De-selects the

Select and
the Main alternative
load an
and route that is
alternative
Alternative currently
route
route loaded
Swaps the Main route with the Alternative route or visa-versa
Page 221 of 406

6.38.9 De-selecting an alternative route
Left Middle Right

Route routes Route
De-selects
Select and Switches the the
load an Main and alternative
alternative Alternative route that is
route route currently
loaded
The alternative route is removed from the screen; the Main route is unaffected and stays
on-screen.
Main Route
Alternative route
no longer loaded
Page 222 of 406

6.39 Route Monitoring
6.39.1 Monitoring routes in Radar or ECDIS modes
Route monitoring in Single radar display Select the Route Data icon.
Route monitoring tab in dual radar display
Route monitor can be used to monitor the vessels progress on a preloaded route. There are
no user configurable options in the route monitoring dialogues.
Depending on the mode selected, route monitoring will display the following:
XTD Cross track Distance in nautical miles (NM).

The name or identifier (e.g. WP6) of the next waypoint in the
Next WPT
planned route.
CTS Current Course to Steer to follow the route.
Speed To Go is the speed that has been calculated in order to
STG
achieve the planned time of arrival at a waypoint (if set).
Distance to WOP The distance to the next wheel over point in the planned route.
Time to WOP The time to the next wheel over point in the planned route.
Estimated time and date of arrival at the last waypoint in the
ETA at final WPT
planned route
Page 223 of 406

6.39.2 Monitoring from within route editing
Route Monitoring option opens a table that shows the ship's progress on a loaded route. The
table shows the waypoints in the route with the Ownship's current position (shown as OS) at
the appropriate part of the route.
Left Middle Right

Select Main Route
De-select Route
Route settings
Select and load Opens route De-selects the

a route settings current route
With a route loaded, the Open Route Monitoring Dialog button becomes available in the
route settings/ general tab menu.
Note: If no route is loaded, the Open route monitoring dialogue is not available.
Left Middle Right
Route
Monitor
Opens the
route
monitoring
dialogue
Page 224 of 406

When Open Route Monitoring dialog is selected, the following panel opens at the bottom
of the chart area. Using the minimise/ maximise buttons, the dialogue box can be maximised
to fill the screen set to ‘normal’ or reduced to a single line showing the current waypoint.
Left Middle Right
Expand/ Contract/
Contract Expand
Minimise/ Minimise/
maximise maximise the
the route No Function route
monitoring monitoring
box box
Maximised Normal (default) Minimised
In normal view, use the scroll bar to move up and down the waypoint listing
The following list provides a brief description of the Route Monitoring Box columns:
 Route Monitoring: Displays the name of the route being monitored

 WP: Waypoint Number
 Name: The name of the waypoint as assigned in route planning.
 Latitude: Latitude of the waypoint
 Longitude: Longitude of the waypoint
 Course: The course between the current waypoints
 Length: The distance between the current waypoints
 Dist To WP: Distance to go to the waypoint or ‘passed’ if the ship has already passed the waypoint
 Speed: Speed value used to calculate the ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) at the waypoint
 Date Time: Calculated ETA at the waypoint or the desired time of arrival. If the waypoint has been
passed, the time of arrival at the waypoint is displayed.
 Hours: Time to waypoint.
 OS: Ownship current position
Page 225 of 406

Speed and ETA calculations route monitoring
The mode of Speed/ETA calculations can be selected from a drop-down list box which
provides the following options:
ETA uses Current SOG:

The current Speed Over Ground (SOG) is used to calculate the ETA at the next and all
subsequent waypoints.
ETA uses Planned Speed:

The speed set during route planning is used to calculate the ETAs at the next and all
subsequent waypoints.
ETA uses Set Speed (entered manually):

Adjust speed for entire route
The speed for the entire route can be manually entered. To set the speed, place the cursor
in the Set Speed box and use the trackerball to adjust the speed value.
Alternatively the speed can be set for each leg of the journey. Click in the Speed column
required and the following options become available:
Left Middle Right
Set for Data Reset to

Entry Default
Restores the
selected
Selects the speed to the
speed No Function original
column speed set in
route
planning
Click on the speed to be changed and enter a new speed value using the keyboard
Page 226 of 406

Speed uses Set Arrival Time:
The arrival time set for the last (or other) waypoint is used to calculate the speed required to
stay on schedule.
To set the desired arrival time at a particular waypoint, Click in the Date / Time column
required and the following options become available:
Left Middle Right
Set for Data Reset to

Entry Default
Restores the
selected
Selects the speed to the
time / date No Function original
column speed set in
route
planning
NOTE: The date format is DD/ MM/ YYY, time is 24 hours
When a time of arrival has been entered set, the Speed required to arrive at a waypoint.
The text for the time and date values that have been changed from yellow to white and has
(SET) shown after the time figure.
Where a set time of arrival become unattainable even at maximum allowed speed, the time
of arrival is displayed in ORANGE rather than white.
In this case a warning dialogue is displayed and the speed and waypoint ETA calculations
up to a following waypoint are based on the earliest feasible time of arrival at the waypoint in
question.
Page 227 of 406

6.40 Rudder Angle
Dual display Radar mode only Function NOT AVAILABLE in ECDIS mode
NOTE: Rudder angle is only displayed in Radar modes when the rudder
has been configured during the system commissioning.
There are no user configurable functions for the display of rudder angle
Rudder angle in
Single display
Single radar mode
display
Select the
Docking tab
NOTE: See HAP

tab in dual display
for further
Dual radar information on the
display HAP tab and its
configuration
If no rudder is configured, the vessel name and Callsign is

shown in place of the rudder indicator.
Page 228 of 406

6.41 Sensor Selection
A number of functions in both radar and ECDIS modes use drop down lists to allow selection
of a source of inputs to the system; for example speed or position sensor inputs.
Examples of drop down lists in single radar display
Position sensors Heading sensor Speed sensors
When a drop down list is selected, a list of sensors configured during commissioning is
shown.
Each sensor will be shown in either white or black text depending on the sensors input
status:
White text: Sensor Available

Sensors that are shown in WHITE text are correctly configured and are available for
selection.
Black text: Sensor not available

Sensors shown in BLACK TEXT are correctly configured but the signal is not available and
cannot be selected.
Likely causes may be that the source equipment is switched off or has some form of
operation issue.
Example of a gyro drop down list
The Analogue Gyro is available

(White text).
The simulator1 (HDT) and (VHW) are

not available (Black text).
Page 229 of 406

6.42 Show/ Hide ECDIS menus
The Show/Hide Button can be used to minimise or maximise the ECDIS menus
Left Middle Right
Show/Hide
Mimimise or
maximise
the chart
menus
Chart in ‘normal’ maximised view
Chart menus minimised
Page 230 of 406

6.43 Set Chart button
Set chart allows the selection of IMO specified levels of chart display.
With the cursor placed over the Set Chart button the
Left Middle Right
Suppress all Standard

Base Display
overlays Display
Suppress all overlays Base display Standard display
Press and hold Suppress Selects Base display which Selects Standard Display
all overlays which shows the IMO Minimal which shows the IMO
momentarily removes layers required chart layers Standard required chart
showing the chart only and layers
ownship
NOTE: When Base display is selected or if chart features in the standard display are
deselected in Chart settings/ Advanced tab, the Set Chart button will change colour to
Magenta indicating that the chart is less than the IMO Standard display level
Deselecting any of the following chart features in Chart settings/ Advanced tab will also
cause the Set chart button to change colour.
 Anchorage
 Buoys & beacons
 Land features
 Lights
 Seabed area
 Scale boundary
 Special area
 Traffic & routing
Page 231 of 406

6.44 Set position
In ECDIS mode, Set position allows the entry of a known set of co-ordinates.
With the cursor placed over the Set Posn button, the following option is available:
Left Middle Right
Jump to
Position
Allows the
entry of a
known set of
co-ordinates
To adjust the Latitude and Longitude positions, place the

cursor over each number to be adjusted then press and hold
over the numbers; arrows will appear above and below the
numbers.
Roll the tracker ball to adjust

the figures and cardinal
values.
Cancel: Close the dialogue box and abandon changes

(alternatively press the red cross X)
Accept: Accepts the new position
NOTE: If the new position moves the chart away from Ownship, Fixed scale is automatically
selected at Best scale.
Page 232 of 406

6.45 Speed sensor selection and control
Speed sensor in Single radar display Select the Nav data icon.
Speed sensor in Dual radar display
Place the cursor anywhere on the Speed sensor Selection bar
Left Middle Right

Pressing Select Speed Sensor produces a drop Select
down box where the available speed log sensors can Speed
Source
be viewed and selected (see section 6.38 Sensor
Opens a
selection for general notes on sensor availability). drop down
list of No Function No Function
available
The heading sensor name will change to selected sensors
source.
NOTE 1: When manual speed is selected the speed shown is Speed Through Water (STW).
NOTE 2: Single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway.
NOTE 3: When the speed sensor is changed the stabilisation mode (Sea or Ground) is
automatically selected for the type of sensor.
6.45.1 Speed source identifier
The selected speed sensor type is automatically detected and shown in brackets at the end
of the display as W, B, M or P.
(W): Indicates the sensor is WATER SPEED
(B): Indicates the sensor is BOTTOM TRACK
(M): MANUAL SPEED is selected
(P): Indicates the sensor is POSITION i.e. GPS
Page 233 of 406

6.45.2 Speed source button changing colour
If a speed source is selected that changes the stabilisation mode e.g. sea stabilisation
changes to ground or ground to sea), the Speed Sensor Selection button will temporarily
change colour to warn that the stabilisation mode has changed.
Speed source Selection highlighted in Magenta to indicate a change in stabilisation mode
6.45.3 Manual Log adjustment
When manual log is selected as a speed source, the manual speed can be adjusted by placing the
cursor over the Slider Bar and use the cursor to drag the speed slider to the desired speed.
ECDIS and Dual screen radar display Single Screen radar display
6.45.4 Speed indication and display
Where connected and configured during commissioning, vessel speed can be viewed in all
enabled display modes.
Select the
Nav data icon.
Alternatively
Select the
Docking display
icon
NOTE: The
selected speed
source is
automatically
shown in both Nav
Data and Docking
display modes.
Page 234 of 406

Speed source
selection and
display in Single
Single radar display mode
display
Speed source
selection and
display in Dual
display mode
Dual radar
Select the
display Docking tab
NOTE: The speed

source cannot be
selected or
controlled from the
Docking tab.
This is a visual
indication of speed
only.
6.45.5 Display Dual axis speed log
The speed indicator graphic changes when a dual axis speed source is selected as shown
below:
Speed source Dual axis speed source
Page 235 of 406

6.46 Spyscope
Spyscope is only available in the Spyscope in ECDIS mode

Single radar display
The Spyscope gives a zoomed image of the area below the current cursor position. The
Spyscope can be configured to show images from inside the operational area only or to
operate across the entire screen area.
With the cursor placed anywhere inside the Spyscope viewing area, the following option
becomes available:
Left Middle Right

Toggle
Spyscope
outside PPI
viewing data
across the
entire
screen or
inside the
PPI only
Spyscope restricted to showing inside radar PPI Spyscope outside PPI (placed over speed indication)
Page 236 of 406

6.46.1 Spyscope Zoom
NOTE: Spyscope zoom control is only available in Single radar mode.
In Single radar display only, the spyscope can be zoomed from X1 to X8 magnification. The
default setting is X2 magnification.
The current magnification level is shown at the bottom of the zoom control bar.
Maximum zoom (X8)
Minimum zoom (X1)
Spyscope zoom control
The zoom level resets to X2 when the system is placed into Standby.
Spyscope in ECDIS mode
The zoom level cannot be adjusted in ECDIS mode. The Spyscope adopts the zoom level
set in single radar display mode.
Page 237 of 406

6.47 Stabilisation modes

Stabilisation mode in
Stabilisation modes are not available

in ECDIS mode
The stabilisation button allows the selection of Sea or Ground stabilisation.
With the cursor over the stabilisation button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
SEA GROUND
Stabilised Stabilised
Uses the
course and Selects the
speed course over
No Function
through ground for
water for stabilisation
stabilisation
The button name will change to reflect the stabilisation mode selected.
SEA Stabilised: Uses the course and speed through the water, set and drift are not used.
Sea stabilisation provides an excellent presentation for coastal navigation, Pilotage and anti-
collision. The true trails of targets give an indication of their apparent true motion.
A two dimensional Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment (single axis log or manual
speed input) and gyro provide the sensor input for sea stabilisation. Note that a single axis
log cannot detect the effect of leeway.
Sea stabilisation is affected by tide and wind, the effect of own ship's structure, and will vary
in different locations. A water speed sensor is automatically selected.
Page 238 of 406

GROUND Stabilised: Uses the course over ground.
Ownship log speed and heading, and an input of tide/wind rate and direction can be used to
calculate own ship course and speed over ground.
Without this ground-reference speed and course, stationary targets would appear to drift at a
rate and direction opposite to the tide. Own ship Course over Ground (COG) and Speed
over Ground (SOG) may also be calculated from a dual axis log input.
An Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS) is normally used to provide ground stabilisation
(this is the best option). VTG input from a GPS will also provide COG and SOG.
The ground stabilised true motion presentation can be very useful for Pilotage, when it is
important to know own ship and other ship's course and speed over ground in relation to
land, buoys and beacons. A ground speed sensor is automatically selected.
NOTES
 If the stabilisation mode is changed, the selected speed sensor automatically changes to the best
one available. Stabilisation mode change is not permitted if the required sensor is not available.
The sensor is highlighted for a few seconds when it is changed.
 A known stationary target (Navigational Mark) should not show any movement providing there is
no error in the ground stabilisation.
 Course over Ground (COG) and Speed Over Ground (SOG) boxes are for information only.
 If the GPS no longer sends information or sends an error message, then the radar operational
area will revert automatically to sea-stabilisation.
6.47.1 Stabilisation mode button changes colour
If a speed source is changed, the stabilisation selection button will temporarily change colour
to warn that the speed source has changed.
Stabilisation button changed to Magenta indication a change in speed source
Page 239 of 406

6.48 Tape measure tool
The range and bearing between two points can be measured using the tape measure.
With the cursor placed at one point on the display, press and HOLD the left button:
Select Acquire Set Centre Chart Query Acquire Set Centre
Drag Extend Drag Extend
Press and Press and

No Function No Function No Function No Function
hold hold
Keeping the left button pressed, move the cursor to the required position. The current
cursor range and bearing from the origin of the tape measure can be observed in the cursor
position box.
Whilst the Drag extend button is pressed, the cursor position panel is
outlined in magenta.
The following example shows Drag Extend being used in ECDIS mode.
This shows the range and bearing from an origin, which was placed on an object of interest
and the cursor (white square) placed on ownship. The tape measure is shown as an orange
dotted line.
To STOP Drag extend measurements, release the left hand button and the cursor cue
buttons and cursor position box will revert to their default settings.
Page 240 of 406

6.49 Target Association
Target association Select the Target Data icon.

in Single and Dual radar display
A tracked target and an AIS target for the same vessel may appear
to have different positions or vectors.
Target association allows the user to associate (link) radar tracked targets and AIS targets
that appear to represent the same vessel.
Targets are associated when the radar and AIS targets bearing, speed, COG and SOG are
within an adjustable tolerance level of each other (see target association settings).
When Tracked Target and AIS Targets meet the target association criteria, they become
associated.
Target association notes:

1. AIS target symbol updates
AIS targets are updated depending on target characteristics. To align the AIS target symbols with
a tracked target, the AIS symbol is moved on each scan assuming that the previous course and
speed in unchanged.
2. Target Association button not available
If an AIS input or signal is not detected, the AIS ON and Tgt Assoc ON buttons are greyed out
indicating that the AIS is not available. The AIS and target association cannot be selected.
3. Target Association in ECDIS mode
In ECDIS mode, the optional radar interlay must be enabled and switched ON.
4. All targets associated
When target association criteria are met, all radar tracked targets are associated with the
presumed corresponding AIS target. Individual targets cannot be linked on their own.
5. Loss of association
Any Tracked Target and AIS target that meet the criteria will be associated as long as it
continues to meet the criteria.
When a target fails to meet the association criteria, it will be disassociated and shown as a
separate Tracked Target and AIS target.
Page 241 of 406

6.49.1 Enabling target association
With the cursor placed over the Tgt Assoc button the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Association Association Association

ON Settings OFF
Opens target
Activates De-activates
association
target target
settings
association association
menu
Target association is switched on and targets are associated according to the association
settings.
6.49.2 Target Association Settings
With the cursor placed over the Tgt assoc Button the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

ON Settings OFF
Opens
Activates target De-activates
target association target
association settings association
menu
In target association settings, the balance between a radar tracked

target and AIS targets is set. The settings are detailed on the
following pages.
To adjust a target association setting to a different value, place the

cursor over the Slider Bar and adjust as required.
NOTE: The Delta range, bearing, COG and SOG values cannot
be set individually. These values are set using the target
association slider bar.
Page 242 of 406

A radar tracked target and an AIS targets will be associated (linked) if the Delta values are
less than those shown, the following figures assume the association slider is set to the
default 100% setting.
Delta Range: The differences between tracked targets range and the AIS target
range when the slider is set to 100% must be within 90 meters of
each other
Delta bearing: The differences between tracked targets bearing and the AIS target
bearing when the slider is set to 100% must be within 0.8 degrees of
each other.
Delta COG: The differences between tracked targets COG and the AIS target COG
when the slider is set to 100% must be within 10 degrees of each
other.
Delta SOG: The differences between tracked targets SOG and the AIS target SOG
when the slider is set to 100% must be within 2.5 knots of each other.
Default: Pressing default sets the target association settings to the default
value of 100%.
Slider set to 300%

At 300%, the allowed difference between radar tracked
targets and AIS targets is much greater.
As the tolerances are larger, target association is easier but

there is an increased risk in busy shipping lanes of
associating with the wrong target.
Slider set to 50%

The allowed difference between radar tracked targets and
AIS targets is reduced.
It is harder to associate the target but potential association

with the incorrect target is reduced.
Page 243 of 406

6.49.3 AIS or Radar source for an associated target
The target source for associated target vectors can be switched between radar and AIS.
With the cursor placed over the Display AIS/ Radar as default button, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Set AIS as Set Radar as

default default
Target Target vector

vector is is derived
No Function
derived from from tracked
AIS data target data
The button name will change to reflect the selection.
NOTE 1: This function only operates where tracked targets and AIS targets have been
associated and allows the target to be shown either as a RADAR target or as an AIS target.
Individual tracked or AIS targets that are NOT associated are not affected.
NOTE 2: It is possible to override this setting for individual associated targets. This is done
from the target data dialogue box by changing the selection in the Source field. This sets both
the graphical vector and the numeric content.
Associated target symbols

Depending on the target association settings, associated targets will display one of the
following symbols (targets shown with radar returns suppressed for clarity):
Associated target with AIS+ radar Associated target with Radar + AIS
Un-associated target symbols

Un-associated targets (targets that do not meet the association settings) are show as
separate tracked and AIS target vectors:
Un-associated target
Page 244 of 406

6.49.4 Changing data for individual associated targets
When targets are associated, the target data panel information for individual targets can be
changed between tracked target data or AIS target data.
In the target data panel, with the cursor placed over the Source row for the target of interest,
the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Show AIS Show Radar

data data
The source
The source
of target data
of target
No Function is from the
data is from
radar tracked
the AIS
target
Source set to show data from the AIS Source set to show data from the tracked
target. target
6.49.5 Deactivate target association
With the cursor placed over the Tgt Assoc button the following options are available.
Left Middle Right

ON Settings OFF
Opens target
Activates De-activates
association
target target
settings
association association
menu
Target association is switched OFF.

Radar tracked targets and AIS targets are no longer associated.
Page 245 of 406

6.50 Target Data
Target Data in Single and Dual radar display Select the Target Data icon.
Information on selected AIS, radar

tacked targets or a man over board
symbols are displayed in the Target
Data box.
When a target is selected, a Blue or

Magenta square is placed around the
target and the data is displayed.
The text in the target data box will be

the same colour as the square around
the targets.
AIS Target Tracked target
Page 246 of 406

6.50.1 Target data display
Data from the selected target(s) is shown as below. All target ranges and bearings are show
referenced to ownship CCRP.
Target Data display definitions
Target Name: AIS target name, tracked target or MOB

reference number.
Source: Target association source (See Target
association)
Range: Current range from Ownship CCRP
True trails selected Relative trails selected

T CTW & T STW displayed R CRS & R SPD displayed
CPA: Closest point of approach

TCPA: Time to closest point of approach
BCR: Bow crossing range
BCT: Bow crossing time
Status: AIS class or radar tracked target

MMSI: Vessel MMSI number (AIS targets only)
Callsign: Vessels radio call sign (AIS targets only)
IMO: Vessels IMO number (AIS targets only)
Lat/ Long: Current position of target
Quality: (AIS targets only)

Heading: Targets heading
ROT: Targets rate of turn (AIS targets only)
Length, bean & Drought: Vessels dimensions (AIS
targets only)
Nav status: Current navigation status of the target (AIS

targets only)
Type: Vessel type (AIS targets only)
Dest.: Vessels destination (AIS targets only)
ETA: Vessels estimated time of arrival at destination
(AIS targets only)
Page 247 of 406

6.50.2 Target Tote
The target data display can be switched to Target Tote where targets are be sorted by
varying priorities with reference to ownship’s CCRP.
With the cursor placed over the Tgt Tote ON/ OFF button the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Tote ON Tote OFF
Switches Revert to
ON Target No Function Target data
Tote display
True trails selected

T CRS & T SPD displayed
Relative trails selected

R CRS & R SPD displayed
Target Tote definitions:
Target: AIS vessel name, tracked target or MOB reference number

CPA & TCPA: Closest point of approach and Time to closest point of approach
BCR & BCT: Bow crossing range and Bow crossing time
RNG & BRG: Range and bearing
R CRS & R SPD: Relative course and Relative Speed (shown when vectors are set to Relative)
T CRS & T SPD: True course and True Speed (shown when vectors are set to True)
Callsign: Vessels radio call sign (AIS targets only)
Source: Radar tracked target (Radar) or AIS signal (AIS)
Page 248 of 406

6.50.3 Target Tote priorities
When Target Tote is enabled, targets are sorted according to one of four selectable
priorities:
 Closest Range
 Shortest +ve TCPA
 Shortest +ve TCPA within CPA limit
 Closest CPA with +ve TCPA
With the cursor placed over the current filter (the switch-on default is Shortest +ve TCPA),
the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Select Tote
Mode
Select from
four
different No Function No Function
target
priorities
AIS and tracked targets will now be displayed in using the filter selected.
NOTE: AIS target data is displayed in Target Tote even when AIS targets
are SWITCHED OFF in the AIS control panel.
AIS targets do not need to be selected for the data to be shown In

Target Tote.
Page 249 of 406

6.50.4 Delete ALL Tgts
The Delete ALL Tgts button deletes all tracked targets and sends all AIS targets to sleep.
With the cursor over the Delete ALL Tgts button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Delete ALL
Tracks
Deletes all
tracked
targets & No Function No Function
sleeps all
AIS targets
YES NO
ALL tracked targets will be Cancels the target deletion
deleted and AIS targets are
sent to sleep.
NOTE: When enabled in AIS Settings, Auto activation of sleeping

targets will automatically activate/ reactivate dangerous targets.
Page 250 of 406

6.51 Target Referencing
Referencing tracked targets in ECDIS mode
To reference tracked targets in ECDIS mode, the optional

ECDIS radar interlay must be enabled in optional features and
MODE switched ON using the Radar Control Icon:
6.51.1 Reference (Fix) a tracked target
Tracked targets can be set as a Reference target or set as an Anchor watch.
For accurate COG/ SOG calculations, the tracked target to be used must be stationary.
A target must firstly be acquired and be showing a vector (See Target Tracking – ARPA).
Radar tracked target Tracked target display ECDIS tracked target
NOTE: The ECDIS example shown has the optional radar interlay enabled and switched ON
Page 251 of 406

With the cursor over a target name in the target display, the following options are
available.
Left Middle Right
Fix/ Unfix Set / Reset

target Anchor Watch
Fix
(set as a
reference)
See Target
or
No Function referencing:
Un-fix the
Anchor watch
selected
tracked
target
When selected as a fixed target, the target name

and number will change and be preceded with
‘R’.
For example; target 002 becomes target R-002
When a tracked target is referenced, the COG & SOG

calculations are automatically calculated from the reference
target and are shown as Radar Reference (Auto) in the list
of available COG/ SOG sources.
NOTE 1: Loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the accuracy of the
results for true speed and true course of targets and own speed will be degraded.
Lost reference targets that are of interest will generate a ‘’Lost reference target’ alarm.
NOTE 2: Due to conflicts between common consistent references (CCRP), tracked targets
cannot be acquired as a reference target when AIS targets are switched ON.
Page 252 of 406

6.51.2 Deselect (Un-fix) a referenced tracked target
To Unfix the target, select the referenced target name and press Fix / Unfix target.
Left Middle Right
Fix/ Unfix Set / Reset

target Anchor Watch
Fixes
(sets as a
reference)
See Target
or
No Function referencing:
Un-fixes the
Anchor watch
selected
tracked
target
The ‘R’ will be removed from the target name, e.g. the target name will change from R-001
to 001
If no further reference targets exist, Radar reference (Auto) will not be available in COG /
SOG drop down list and the COG and SOG will search for a working sensor in the following
sequence:
1st : Position Sensors (GPS etc,)

2nd: Any Doppler Log(s)
3rd: Radar reference (if reference targets are available)
4th: Manual
Page 253 of 406

6.51.3 Set anchor watch
In the target display, select a stationary tracked target.
Press the Set / Reset Anchor Watch button to assign the selected target as an anchor
reference.
Left Middle Right

Set / Reset
Fix/ Unfix
Anchor
target
Watch
Set and
Reset a
See target tracked
No Function
referencing target as
Anchor
Watch
When selected as an anchor watch, the target

name and number will change and be preceded
with ‘A’.
For example; target 001 becomes target A-001
The anchor watch limits are set in Alarm Configuration which is accessed from the
standby screen.
The alarm is listed as alarm number ‘319: Anchor Watch limit exceeded’ and has a default
setting of 150 meters (see Alarm Configuration for details on how to change this
parameter).
When the distance between ownship and the anchor watch referenced target is more than
the figure set in the alarm configuration, an Anchor watch alarm is displayed and an audible
alarm will sound.
WARNING: After an anchor watch alarm has been acknowledged, the

target reverts to a reference target. If Anchor Watch is still required, it
must be reactivated.
Page 254 of 406

6.51.4 Reset (remove) anchor watch
To remove the anchor watch, select the target Name and press the Set / Reset Anchor
Watch button.
Left Middle Right

Set / Reset
Fix/ Unfix
Anchor
target
Watch
See target
Set and
referencing:
Reset a
Reference
tracked
(Fix) a No Function
target as
tracked
Anchor
target
Watch
The ‘A’ will be removed from the target name; for example target name will revert from target
A-001 to target 001
6.51.5 Reference target set as an anchor watch
A target can also be made a reference target and then selected as an Anchor watch.
In the target tote box, select the tracked target that is of interest as shown above. Press the
Fix/ Unfix target button to assign the selected target as a reference. Then press Set / Reset
Anchor Watch to assign the selected target as an anchor reference.
The target name and number will change and be preceded with ‘RA’;
for example; target 001 becomes target RA-001
To remove the anchor watch, select the referenced target name and press the Set / Reset
Anchor Watch button.
Page 255 of 406

6.52 Target tracking (ARPA)
General notes on Target tracking
Tracked targets in ECDIS mode
For target tracking in ECDIS mode, the optional radar interlay

ECDIS must be enabled in optional features and switched ON using
MODE the Radar Control Icon:
WARNING
Tracking targets in ECDIS mode using the optional radar interlay is

NOT TYPE APPORVED.
Target tracking in ECDIS mode must not be relied upon for

collision avoidance.
Up to 200 surface targets with relative speeds of up to 150 knots can be tracked. Radar
tracking facilities are available within 0.1 to 24 nautical miles on all range scales.
Tracking is also available in ECDIS mode when the optional ECDIS Radar interlay is
enabled in optional features and is switched ON,
A target does not always mean a land-mass, ship or other surface returns. Targets can also
be returns from sea surface and clutter. As the level of clutter changes with environment,
users should adjust the tune, sea, rain and gain controls to ensure that targets are not
eliminated from the radar screen.
During slow turns there is no effect on tracked targets however, for very high turning rates of
greater than 150°/minute (depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets
which last for a minute or two and then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.
The course of a tracked target lags 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6

seconds at near zero (near 0) relative speed.
When Sea Stabilised presentations are used, the input speed must be ownship Speed
through water not speed over ground.
For target tracking when manual speed is being used, the User MUST adjust the speed input
every time that the Ownship changes speed.
Page 256 of 406

6.52.1 Target tracking: Acquiring a radar target
In single and dual radar modes, with the In ECDIS mode, with the cursor on the
cursor on screen the following options are chart area and the optional radar interlay
available: switched ON, the following options are
available:
Chart Query Acquire Chart Query Acquire Set Centre
Chart query Selects a

Acquires a See
only appears feature on
radar target Set Centre
when the the chart
Acquires a
optional No Function
radar target
Chart radar
feature is
enabled.
With the cursor placed over the radar target of interest, press Acquire.
When Acquire is pressed, A dotted circle is placed around the

target and a sequential number is assigned (e.g. 001).
When the target has been acquired, a vector will be shown.
The target can now be selected.
If the tracked target violates ownship CPA, TCPA settings or is

deemed as a potential collision threat, an alarm will sound.
Page 257 of 406

6.52.2 Target tracking: Selecting a tracked target
Left Middle Right
Select
Acquire
Target
Selects the
target at the
Acquires a
current No Function
radar target
cursor
position
Place the cursor over the target and click on Select Target.
When a target has been selected, the

target data panel automatically opens
and target data is displayed.
The target is highlighted with a Blue or Magenta square

where the colour corresponds with the colour of data in
the target data panel
Target data panel.
Use the scroll bar to view all data
See Target Data (section 6.50) for additional details on the target data panel.
Target tracking: tracking overload
Up to 200 surface targets with relative speeds of up to 150 knots can be tracked.
When the number of tracked targets exceeds 190, an alarm is triggered stating that ‘ARPA:
Tracking targets nearing capacity’.
At 201 targets, an alarm triggers indicating ‘ARPA Tracked target capacity exceeded’.
To track another target requires the deletion of one or more currently tracked (radar) targets.
Page 258 of 406

6.52.3 Deselect or Delete a Tracked target
Left Middle Right
Deselect
Acquire Delete
Target
Deselects Deletes the

the target at target at the
Acquires a
the current current
radar target
cursor cursor
position position
Deselect target Delete target
Place the cursor over the target and Place the cursor over the target and
press Deselect Target. press Delete
The selected target is deleted and

The target continues to be tracked is no longer being tracked.
The square around the target is No warning alarms will be triggered

removed and data for the target is no for the deleted target
longer shown in the target data panel
Data for the target is no longer
shown in the target data panel.
A deselected target
Target data panel with no data.
Deletion of reference and anchor watch targets
Where a deleted tracked target was set as a reference and the speed source is set to use
radar reference, the speed source will revert from Radar reference to the best speed source
available. If more than one target is being used as a reference, the COG and SOG will
automatically switch to the next available reference target.
Caution: If a target is deleted that has been assigned as an Anchor

watch, all anchor watch monitoring for the deleted target is
suspended.
Page 259 of 406

6.52.4 Target tracking: Lost targets
If a target is not seen for 20 consecutive scans and the target is of interest, a Lost Target
alarm is triggered and a lost target symbol is drawn at the last known position of the target.
If the target is not of interest, it is deleted.
Lost targets that require operator deletion occur in the following conditions:
 The target is within 3.0 nautical miles of ownship.

 The target has a positive TCPA i.e. the target is approaching ownship.
 The target has been assigned as a reference target or an anchor watch.
Cancel the alarm to delete the Lost Target symbol and silence the audible alarm.
6.52.5 ARPA target symbols and alarms
Examples of ARPA tracking taken in radar mode
Number
of ARPA target in
Target Status ARPA target
antenna Collision warning
sweeps
Target being acquired New target
Dashed green circle on target Dashed green circle on target
Maximum
12 sweeps
Target acquired to aquire
target
Green circle and vector on Red circle and vector on target
target
Weak target alarm Alarm

sounds 8
sweeps
after loss
of target Green cross and vector at last Red cross and vector at last
known position of target known position of target
Lost target alarm Alarm

sounds 20
sweeps
after loss of
a target
Red cross (no vector) at last Red cross (no vector) at last
known position of target known position of target
Page 260 of 406

6.53 Trial Manoeuver
Trial Manoeuver in Select the Target Data icon.

A Trial Manoeuvre simulates an intended change of course and/ or speed. This allows the
user to assess the effect of a change of course, speed, time to manoeuvre, and rate of turn
(ROT) in order to plan any avoiding action in a potential collision situation.
The Trial Manoeuvre function is applied to both tracked targets and AIS targets and shows
predicted positions of tracked, reported targets and ownship.
Ownship’s intended speed, course and a 'delay time' are entered. Assuming that all tracked
and reported targets maintain their present speeds and courses, the targets’ and ownship’s
future movements are simulated.
NOTE: When trial manoeuvre is enabled, a red ‘T’ is displayed at the

bottom of the display..
With the cursor over the Trial Manoeuvre button, the following function is available.
Left Middle Right
Enable Trial
Manoeuvre
Enables trial
manoeuvre
and opens
the trial
manoeuvre
Menu
NOTE: When trial manoeuvre is enabled, vectors are set to relative
Page 261 of 406

Course
The trial course can be changed in +/- 5 degree steps.
A single click on the -5 deg or +5 deg buttons changes the
course by 5 degrees.
The Trial Course is shown in the Trial Manoeuvre dialogue

box and the effect of the proposed change in course is
shown on screen as a new vector.
Planned ROT
A default ROT value is set on installation and is
automatically selected. Other rates of turn can be selected
using the drop down list.
The button name will change to reflect the selected ROT
Speed
The trial speed can be changed in +/-1 knot steps. A single
click on the -1kn or +1kn buttons changes the course by 1
knot.
The Trial speed is shown in the Trial Manoeuvre dialogue

box and the effect of the proposed change in speed is
shown on screen.
Acceleration and deceleration

A default Acc./Dec (acceleration/ deceleration) value is set
on installation and is automatically selected. Other rates
can be selected using the drop down list.
The button name will change to reflect the selected value.
Delay
The delay represents the time lag from the present time to
the time when ownship will start to change speed and/or
course.
Maneuvering characteristics such as rudder, turning and

acceleration delay must be considered when using trial
manoeuver, this is particularly important on large vessels.
When a trial is activated, the delay time defaults to 10

minutes.
The delay can be changed in +/-1-minute steps between 1

and 30 minutes.
The button name will change to reflect the selected value.
Page 262 of 406

Trial manoeuvre
vector
Radar mode Radar mode

Trial manoeuver OFF Trial manoeuver ON
Trial manoeuvre
vector
ECDIS mode ECDIS mode

Trial manoeuver OFF Trial manoeuver ON
NOTE: As the trial manoeuvre parameters are configured, the

vectors change to show the relative change of direction caused by
the manoeuvre. Vectors will turn red if a collision course is
detected.
Start Countdown
Once configured, the trail manoeuvre can be started. With the cursor over the Start
Countdown button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Start
Reset timer
Countdown
Resets the
Commences
countdown
the trial
No Function timer to
manoeuvre
10:00
countdown
minutes
Page 263 of 406

6.54 UTC Time
UTC time in Single and Dual radar display Select the Nav data icon.
Or
Selec UTC time in the chart control panel
6.54.1 Setting UTC time
With the cursor placed over the UTC time button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
UTC Local Set Local
Opens a
Selects time
Selects time dialogue for
to be shown
to be shown setting the
in Local
in UTC local time
Time
offset.
NOTE 1: If UTC time is NOT from an IEC61162 ZDA time source an

asterisk appears in the UTC button.
NOTE 2: AIS data is inaccurate if UTC time is not available. AIS

symbols will be shown with broken lines.
Page 264 of 406

UTC Time: Set Local
When Set Local is selected, the Select Active Device panel opens where a time source
can be selected and configured.
Available sources of time: A selectable list of active and

available sources of time
Selected Device: Shows the time source selected from
available sources of time.
Local offset: selects the UTC offset (see below)
Cancel: Exits Select active devices, no changes are saved.
OK: Exits Select active devices and accepts all changes.
Current Device: Shows the time source currently in use.
With the cursor placed over the Local offset button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Configure
Device
Opens the
Set Offset for
Local Time
configuration
Current Time Source: Indicates the current time source

in use.
UTC offset: When selected, opens a drop down list
where a +12 or -13 hour offset can be selected.
Daylight saving: When ticked, the system automatically
adjusts the local time for daylight saving.
Cancel: Exits Set Offset for Local Time, no changes are
saved.
OK: Exits Set Offset for Local Time and accepts all
changes.
Page 265 of 406

6.55 Video settings
Video settings in Single and Dual radar display Video settings in ECDIS mode
The Video Settings button allows you to change the colour palette, intensity and
backlight levels for specific layers.
WARNING
Chart/Map brilliance adjustment in ECDIS mode
To maintain the required chart colour and luminance settings, the

chart/ map video settings MUST NOT be adjusted when the EDCIS
ECDIS is set to display in S52 palette
Chart
brilliance In S52 palette, Char/Map MUST BE left at the maximum setting
(slider fully to the right)
To open the video settings control, press the Video Settings button:
Page 266 of 406

6.55.1 Adjusting video levels
In video settings, with the cursor placed on any of the video settings sliders the following
option is available:
Left Middle Right
Adjust Data
levels
Adjusts the
video level
for the No Function No Function
selected
Minimum Maximum slider
Video
Description
setting
Data Data outside the radar/ chart operational area
Graphics
Graphics within the radar/ chart operational area such as heading line, ship's
outline, stern line, range rings etc
Brightness of the Charts and the User Maps
Chart/ Map Chart/ Map adjustment in ECDIS mode.

To maintain the required chart colour and luminance settings, the chart/ map video
settings MUST NOT be adjusted when in EDCIS is set to display S52 palette. In S52
palette, Char/Map MUST BE left at the maximum setting (slider fully to the right)
Nav Tools Navigation tools such as VRMs, EBLs and PI lines
Targets All graphics associated with tracked and AIS targets
Radar Colour and brightness for radar data (see following page for full operation description)
Trails Colour and brightness for target trails (see following page for full operation description)
Fixed Tgt Colour for fixed targets in ETD mode/ Enhanced correlator (see following page for
Colour full operation description)
Moving Tgt Colour for the moving targets in ETD mode/ Enhanced correlator (see following
Colour page for full operation description)
Page 267 of 406

6.55.2 Changing colours in video settings
The colours of radar returns, radar trails, fixed target and moving target (ETD and enhanced
correlator modes) can be changed from the default colours to yellow, green, red, orange,
light blue or white.
Some adjustments are for Radar 1 and Radar 2 which are defined as follows:
Radar 1 Radar 2
Main display in PPI tab
single and dual or
display modes ETD tab of dual
and radar display
ECDIS interlay in
ECDIS mode
The following example shows changing the colour of the radar returns in the main (radar 1)
display. The adjustment procedure is common to radar, trails fixed Tgt and moving Tgt
colours.
Top slider adjusts Bottom slider adjusts

Brilliance of Radar PPI 1 Brilliance of Radar PPI 2
Left Middle Right
Adjust Adjust
Radar 1 Radar 2
Cursor placed over Radar text
Change the Change the
colour of the No Function colour of the
main PPI 2nd PPI
Top slider: Display 1 set to orange (radar colour 4)
Bottom slider: Display 2 set as white (radar colour 6)
Page 268 of 406

6.55.3 Fixed and Moving Targets the ‘Same as Radar’
When Enhanced Correlator or ETD mode is selected, the colour of moving and fixed targets
can be linked to the main radar screen colours.
When linked, changing the colour of the radar also changes the linked colours for ETD or
Enhanced correlation modes.
When ticked, the Fixed Tgt Colour is linked to the

colour of the Main display (PPI 1)
nd
When ticked, the Fixed Tgt Colour is linked to 2
display in the PPI tab (PPI 2) of dual display mode
When ticked, the Moving Tgt Colour is linked to the

colour of the Main display (PPI 1)
nd
When ticked, the Moving Tgt Colour is linked to 2
display in the PPI tab (PPI 2) of dual display mode
When deselected (Not ticked), the colours for Fixed and Moving targets can be
independently configured.
WARNING
If Fixed Tgt colours and Moving Tgt colours are BOTH linked to the
radar colour, it is difficult to determine moving targets from fixed
targets when ETD mode or the Enhanced correlator is enabled.
Page 269 of 406

6.55.4 Daylight/ Dusk / Night video settings
The Daylight/ Dusk/ Night button can be accessed from the Video Settings button and/ or
the standby screen:
Daylight/ Dusk/ Night button in Video settings Daylight/ Dusk/ Night button from standby
With the cursor placed over the Daylight/ Dusk/ Night button, the following pre-defined
screen brilliance levels are available.
Left Middle Right
Daylight Dusk Night
Switches to
Daylight
viewing
Switches to Switches to
Also toggles
Dusk Night
between
viewing viewing
Day Bright
and Day
Night
The button name will change to show the display level selected.
BACKLIGHT/ DAYLIGHT WARNING

Exercise caution at night when Selecting colour schemes as this resets
the backlight to the calibrated settings for the selected scheme.
Switching from Night to Daylight places the backlight to maximum which
may temporarily affect the operator's vision, due to the relative brightness
of the daylight colour scheme during night-time conditions.
Page 270 of 406

6.55.5 Day bright/ day night in ECDIS or Chart radar modes
When ECDIS or Chart radar modes are in operation and daylight viewing is selected,
repeated presses of the daylight button toggles between Day Bright and Day Night (see
section 6.8.10):
Left Middle Right
Daylight Dusk Night
Repeated
presses
toggles
Switches to Switches to
between
Dusk viewing Night viewing
Day Bright
and Day
Night
Day Bright Day Black background
Caution: The Daylight button does not show if Day bright or day night is
selected.
Page 271 of 406

6.55.6 Backlight brilliance
The display backlight brilliance can be adjusted using the front panel control
Screen brilliance
Increases or decrease the backlight illumination of the main widescreen TFT display
Reduce Brilliance
Pressing the DOWN arrow reduces the screen brilliance.
Increase Brilliance
Pressing the UP arrow increases the screen brilliance
RESET Brilliance
Press and hold both the brilliance up and down buttons for 2
seconds.
The screen will revert to the default brilliance setting for the colour
scheme currently in use (Daylight/ Duck/ Night & day bright or day
night).
Note: Resetting the screen brilliance does not change the Daylight/ Dusk/ Dark mode, or day
bright/ day night video settings.
These remain set at the user configured settings.
BACKLIGHT RESET WARNING

Exercise caution at night when resetting the backlight brilliance.
Resetting the backlight places the backlight to the default level for the
colour scheme in use which may temporarily affect the operator's vision,
due to the relative brightness of the selected colour scheme during night-
time conditions.
Video settings
Page 272 of 406

6.56 VRM and EBL
VRM & EBL in Select the Nav tools icon.

6.56.1 Variable Range Markers (VRM)
With the cursor placed over the VRM button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
VRM 1 VRM 2
ON/ OFF ON/ OFF
Switches Switches
VRM 1 VRM 2
No Function
ON/OFF ON/OFF
Orange VRM Green VRM
The indication to the left and right of the VRM

button indicates the status each variable
range marker.
The status is either OFF or showing the VRM1 OFF VRM 2 set
radius of the VRM at 1.50 NM
Did you know…?

The range of the VRM can be changed from Nautical miles to metric or
CPA. See cursor configuration for details (section 6.13.3)
Page 273 of 406

6.56.2 Adjusting the VRM
When the cursor is placed over a variable range marker, the line becomes BOLD.
VRM un-selected x x VRM selected
With the cursor placed over a VRM, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Adjust Value Set Origin
Places the
Press to
centre of the
Select and
VRM at the
adjust the No Function
current
VRM below
cursor
the cursor
position
Reset
Set Value Reset Value Set Origin
Origin
Fixes the Fixesthe

Resets the Returns the
new range position for
VRM to its VRM to
of the No Function No Function the
original ownship
selected selected
range CCRP
VRM VRM
6.56.3 Electronic bearing line (EBL)
With the cursor placed over the EBL button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
EBL 1 EBL 2
ON/ OFF ON/ OFF
Switches Switches
EBL 1 EBL 2
No Function
ON/OFF ON/OFF
Orange EBL Green EBL
The indication to the left and right of the

EBL button indicates the status each
electronic bearing line.
The status is either OFF or showing the EBL 1 OFF EBL 2 set
bearing of the EBL in degrees at 115.0 degrees
Page 274 of 406

6.56.4 Adjusting the EBL
When the cursor is placed over an electronic bearing line, the line becomes BOLD.
EBL un-selected
EBL selected (line becomes bold)
With the cursor placed over an EBL, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
True /
Adjust Value Set Origin
Relative
Press to Switches Places the

Select and between EBL on the
adjust the True or current
EBL below Relative cursor
the cursor EBL position
Reset
Set Value Reset Value Set Origin
Origin
Accepts the Fixes the

Resets the Returns the
bearing of position for
EBL to its EBL to
the No Function No Function the
original ownship
selected selected
bearing CCRP
EBL EBL
EBL true or relative

Switches both EBL 1 and EBL 2 between True (T) or Relative (R)
EBL in True (T) mode EBL in Relative (R) mode
6.56.5 Electronic range and bearing line (ERBL)
An EBL and a VRM can be associated by placing the

cursor on the intersection of the EBL and VRM and left-
clicking. The EBL and VRM can then be adjusted
together.
The cursor button functions are the same as for adjusting EBRL
the VRM and EBL
Page 275 of 406

6.57 Vectors
Vectors are available for tracked targets and activated AIS targets. Vectors assume a
constant target velocity (course and speed) and in the case of relative vectors, assume that
ownship maintains its current velocity.
True (T) and Relative (R) target vectors can be selected. Vector properties are common to
tracked radar and AIS targets.
6.57.1 True/ Relative Vector(s)
With the cursor over the Vector Length button, the following options are available.
Left Middle Right
Vector True/ Vessel Time marks

Relative Prediction ON/OFF
Switch
Switches the
between Switches time
vessel
True (T) marks on the
prediction
and vector ON/
dialogue ON/
Relative (R) OFF
OFF
vectors
The Target Data display information for course and speed will change depending on which
vector type (True or relative) is selected (see target data):
True trails selected Relative trails selected

T CTW & T STW displayed R CRS & R SPD displayed
Page 276 of 406

6.57.2 Setting Vector length
The vector length can be adjusted by dragging the Vector length slider to the desired value.
Left Middle Right
Adjust
Vector
Length
Adjusts the
Adjustment range 0 to 30 Min length of the No Function No Function
vector
(minutes)
6.57.3 Time marks
Left Middle Right

Switch
Switches the
between Switches
vessel
True (T) time marks
prediction
and on the vector
dialogue ON/
Relative (R) ON/ OFF
OFF
vectors
When Time marks are switched ON, markers are placed on the vector a 1 minute intervals.
Vector time marks OFF Vector time marks ON
Page 277 of 406

6.57.4 Vessel Predictor
The vessel predictor shows a curved vector and outlines of the vessel in its predicted
position.
Prediction calculations are based on the current position, rate of turn, motion over the
ground as reported by the selected sensor, (e.g. GPS or log) and drift based on the currently
selected heading and speed sensors.
Left Middle Right

Switch
Switches
between Switches time
the vessel
True (T) marks on the
prediction
and vector ON/
dialogue
Relative (R) OFF
ON/ OFF
vectors
NOTE: When the Vessel predictor menu is

selected in ECDIS mode, the Vector Length
adjuster is not shown.
Show Path Predictor:

When enabled, places an orange vector on
screen.
Show Vessel Outlines:

When enabled places outlines of the vessel
on screen. The vessel outlines are shown at
one-minute intervals. The number of Vessel
Outlines is dependent on the Predictor
length.
Predictor length:
Sets the length of the predictor between 1
and 6 minutes.
Page 278 of 406

6.57.5 Vessel predictor on-screen symbols
No predictor enabled Path Predictor ON
Predictor Vessel outline ON Predictor path & vessel outline ON
6.58 Vector chart types
When enabled, ECDIS and Chart radar modes are capable of displaying the following charts:
 IHO/ IC-ENC S-57 Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) vector based charts.
 IHO/ IC-ENC S-63 Encrypted ENCs as supplied by Primar Stavanger, UK Admiralty ENC
service and other hydrographic offices.
 C-Map vector based charts including Professional, Professional+ and C-Map ENC.
Page 279 of 406

6.59 Wind Information and display
Where connected and configured during commissioning, the Wind direction and speed in
True or Relative can be viewed in all enabled display modes.
Select the
Docking display
icon
Then select the

Wind tab
Select the
Wind tab
Single radar
display
Select the
Docking tab
Dual radar
display
6.59.1 Selecting True or Relative wind
Within the Wind display place the cursor placed over the True or Relative button, the
Left Middle Right
Relative
True Wind
Wind
Sets display
Sets display
to show
to show
Relative
True Wind
Wind
No Function
Wind
Wind
direction
direction
relative to
relative to
North
ships head
Page 280 of 406

Chapter 7: Alarm configuration
7 Alarm configuration
Alarms can be enabled, configured or disabled in the alarm configuration page.
The various functions are accessed by selecting the Alarm Configuration icon in the
Standby Activities area of the standby screen:
The Alarm Configuration chapter comprises of the following sections:
Chapter 7.1: Alarm configuration

An overview of enabling, disabling, configuration and audio for alarms.
Chapter 7.2: Alarm configuration password.

Password management within alarm configuration.
Chapter 7.3: Alarm listings

A list of all alarms shown in alarm configuration.
Page 281 of 406

7.1 Alarm Configuration
The alarm configuration page has the following columns:
Alarm: An alarm number associated with a specific alarm.

The alarm number/ ID cannot be changed.
Priority: A priority status for each alarm as follows.
The priority status of each alarm is fixed and cannot be changed.
Message: A description of each alarm.
Limit: Some alarms have a configurable distance or time limits that are displayed in
this column.
Unit: The unit of measure for the limit.
Enable: Switch the selected alarm ON/ OFF.
Transfer: Switch the transfer of the selected alarm to external systems such as Bridge
Navigation Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) ON/ OFF.
7.1.1 Alarm Priorities
Alarm priorities cannot be changed.
Higher priority alarms will override lower priority alarms, for example a collision alarm
(Emergency priority) will appear as a higher priority than an ARPA: Weak Target (Warning
priority).
Alarms are listed in the alarm panel in order of priority as follows:
 Emergency
 Primary
 Secondary
 Warning
Page 282 of 406

7.1.2 Setting alarm limits
Some alarms have limits, for example Anchor watch.
To adjust the limit, place the cursor in the limits box and use the keyboard to enter the
desired value.
7.1.3 Enable/ Disable alarms.
Individual alarms can be switched ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled) by placing the cursor on
the Enable or Transfer column for the required alarm and selecting Enable or Disable.
The Transfer column switches the transfer of alarms to external systems such as Bridge
Navigation Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) ON/ OFF.
The Enable Column switches alarms ON/ OFF within the system.
Changes in alarm status must be saved using the Save Settings button before exiting the
alarm configuration page.
7.1.4 Alarm audio ON/ OFF
The audio alarm can be switched OFF.
Alarm Audio Enabled box Ticked: Audio ON

Alarm Audio Enabled box NOT Ticked: Audio OFF
WARNING
With audio switched OFF, regardless of the alarm priority or condition
NO AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE GENERATED
Page 283 of 406

7.1.5 Save and Close alarm configuration
Save and Exit.

Press Save Settings to save changes made in the alarms configuration page.
The system will prompt for a password.
The factory default password for alarm configuration is: PASSWORD
Enter the password and press accept (the password is case sensitive). The changes are
saved and the system exits the alarm configuration page.
Close
Press Close to exit the alarms configuration page.
If changes have been made but

not saved, the following warning
is displayed:
YES: Closes the alarm

configuration without saving
changes.
NO: Returns to the alarm

configuration page.
Page 284 of 406

7.2 Alarm configuration password
A password is required to save any changes made in alarm configuration.
This password can be changed by the user.
The factory default password for alarm configuration is: PASSWORD
WARNING
Passwords cannot be remotely reset. If a password is changed and
forgotten, an engineer will need to attend to reset the password.
Attendance to reset a lost or forgotten password is not covered under

warranty.
Noting the above warnings, to change the password, press Change Password.
Type in the default or current password

and press accept.
Enter and repeat the new password and

press Accept.
Note: Passwords are CASE SENSITIVE.
If the password is incorrectly entered, a

warning is shown. Carefully re-enter the
password.
A note should be made of the new password which may be required by authorised Kelvin
Hughes engineers carrying out maintenance tasks.
Page 285 of 406

7.3 Alarms listing
The following is a list of alarms found in the alarm configuration page.
Alarm Alarm Text Description
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a GLL message from a position sensor.
11
(GLL) The GLL message provides position information.
Indicates that the horizontal datum of the position provided in a GLL
Position: GLL Datum Not message from a position sensor is not known.
12
Known The horizontal datum is provided in a DTM message from a position
sensor.
Indicates that a GLL message from a position sensor has not been
Position: Loss of position
13 received for the specified time.
(GLL)
The GLL message provides position information.
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a GGA message from a position sensor.
14
(GGA) The GGA message provides position information.
Indicates that a GGA message from a position sensor has not been
(GGA)
The GGA message provides position information.
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a GNS message from a position sensor.
16
(GNS ) The GNS message provides position information.
Indicates that the position provided in a GNS message from a
17 Position: GNS Lost Differential
position sensor no longer incorporates differential corrections.
Indicates that a GNS message from a position sensor has not been
(GNS)
The GNS message provides position information.
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a DTM message from a position sensor.
19
(DTM) The DTM message provides horizontal datum information.
Position: Datum not WGS84 Indicates that the horizontal datum in the DTM message from a
20
(DTM) position sensor is no WGS84.
Indicates that a DTM message from a position sensor has not been
21 Position: Loss of datum (DTM) received for the specified time.
The DTM message provides horizontal datum information.
Speed Log: Invalid message Indicates an error with a VHW message from a speed log sensor.
22
(VHW) The VHW message provides water speed information.
Indicates that a VHW message from a speed log sensor has not
Speed Log: Loss of speed
23 been received for the specified time.
(VHW)
The VHW message provides water speed information.
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a VTG message from a position sensor.
24
(VTG) The VTG message provides SOG and COG information.
Indicates that a VTG message from a position sensor has not been
25 Position: Loss of vector (VTG) received for the specified time.
The VTG message provides SOG and COG information.
Indicates that a TVT message has an error.
26 Radar: Invalid message (TVT)
The TVT message provides Vector time information.
Indicates that a TVT message has not been received for the specified
Radar: Loss of vector time
27 time.
(TVT)
The TVT message provides Vector time information.
Indicates an error with a TTM message.
29 Radar: Invalid message (TTM)
The TTM message provides tracked target information.
Indicates that a TTM message has not been received for the
30 Radar: Loss of target (TTM) specified time.
The TTM message provides tracked target information.
Indicates an error with a DPT message from a depth sensor.
31 Depth: Invalid message (DPT)
The DPT message provides depth information.
Page 286 of 406

Indicates that a DPT message from a depth sensor has not been
32 Depth: Loss of depth (DPT) received for the specified time.
The DPT message provides depth information.
Indicates an error with a DBT message from a depth sensor.
33 Depth: Invalid message (DBT)
The DBT message provides depth information.
Indicates that a DBT message from a depth sensor has not been
34 Depth: Loss of depth (DBT) received for the specified time.
The DBT message provides depth information.
Heading: Invalid Heading Indicates an error with a HDT message from a heading sensor.
35
(HDT) The HDT message provides heading information.
Indicates that a HDT message from a heading sensor has not been
Heading: Loss of heading
(HDT)
The HDT message provides heading information.
Speed: Invalid message Indicates an error with a VBW message from a speed sensor.
37
(VBW) The VBW message provides water and ground speed information.
Indicates that a VBW message from a speed sensor has not been
38 Speed: Loss of speed (VBW) received for the specified time.
The VBW message provides water and ground speed information.
Position: Invalid message Indicates an error with a ZDA message from a position sensor.
39
(ZDA) The ZDA message provides time information.
Indicates that a ZDA message from the position sensor has not been
40 Position: Loss of time (ZDA) received for the specified time.
The ZDA message provides time information.
Indicates an error with a NSD message from an autopilot. The NSD
Autopilot: Invalid message
41 message provides navigation status information from a C-Plath
(NSD)
autopilot.
Indicates that a NSD message from an autopilot has not been
42 Autopilot: Loss of status (NSD) received for the specified time. The NSD message provides
navigation status information from a C-Plath autopilot.
Indicates an error with an ASD message from an autopilot. The ASD
43 message provides autopilot status information from a C-Plath
(ASD)
autopilot.
Indicates that an ASD message from an autopilot has not been
Autopilot: Loss of system data
44 received for the specified time. The ASD message provides autopilot
(ASD)
status information from a C-Plath autopilot.
Indicates an error with a VLW message from a speed sensor. The
45 Speed: Invalid message (VLW)
VLW message provides log distance information.
Indicates that a VLW message from a speed sensor has not been
46 Speed: Loss of distance (VLW) received for the specified time. The VLW message provides log
distance information.
Indicates an error with a MWV message from a wind sensor. The
47 Wind: Invalid message (MWV)
MWV message provides wind information.
Indicates that a MWV message from a wind sensor has not been
48 Wind: Loss of wind (MWV) received for the specified time. The MWV message provides wind
information.
Indicates an error with a STA message from an autopilot. The STA
49 message provides autopilot status information from an Anschütz
(STA)
autopilot.
Indicates that a STA message from an autopilot has not been
50 Autopilot: Loss of status (STA) received for the specified time. The STA message provides autopilot
status information from an Anschütz autopilot.
Indicates an error with a VDM message from AIS.
51 AIS: Invalid message (VDM)
The VDM message provides AIS information.
Page 287 of 406

Indicates that a VDM message from AIS has not been received for
52 AIS: Loss of AIS (VDM) the specified time.
The VDM message provides AIS information.
Heading: Invalid message Indicates an error with a ROT message from a heading sensor.
53
(ROT) The ROT message provides Rate Of Turn information.
Indicates that a ROT message from a heading sensor has not been
54 Heading: Loss of ROT (ROT) received for the specified time.
The ROT message provides Rate Of Turn information.
Indicates an error with a RPM message from a propulsion sensor.
Propulsion: Invalid message
55 The RPM message provides shaft or engine revolution rate and
(RPM)
propeller pitch information.
Indicates that a RPM message from a propulsion sensor has not
Propulsion: Loss of RPM
56 been received for the specified time. The RPM message provides
(RPM)
shaft or engine revolution rate and propeller pitch information.
Rudder: Invalid message Indicates an error with a RSA message from a rudder sensor. The
57
(RSA) RSA message provides rudder angle information.
Indicates that a RSA message from a rudder sensor has not been
59 Rudder: Loss of rudder (RSA) received for the specified time.
The RSA message provides rudder angle information.
60 SAM: Invalid SAM Message Indicates an error with a message from a Status and alarm module.
61 SAM: Loss of SAM Indicates that no message has been received for the specified time.
Central Alarm: Invalid Indicates an error with an ACK message from a central alarm unit.
62
message (ACK) The ACK message provides alarm acknowledgement information.
Indicates that an ACK message from a central alarm unit has not
Central Alarm: Loss of
acknowledgement (ACK)
The ACK message provides alarm acknowledgement information.
Central Alarm: Invalid Indicates an error with an ALR message from a central alarm unit.
64
message (ALR) The ALR message provides alarm information.
Indicates that an ALR message from a central alarm unit has not
Central Alarm: Loss of alarm
(ALR)
The ALR message provides alarm information.
Speed: VBW Water speed Indicates an error with a VBW message from a speed log sensor.
66
invalid The VBW message provides water speed information.
Indicates that a VBW message from a speed log sensor has not been
Speed: VBW Ground speed
invalid
The VBW message provides water speed information.
Heading: Invalid heading Indicates an error with a THS message from a heading sensor.
68
(THS) The THS message provides heading information.
Indicates that a THS message from a heading sensor has not been
Heading: Loss of heading
(THS)
The THS message provides heading information.
USB: FSD-A178 Interface Indicates that the USB interface between the Processor Unit
213
failed Motherboard and the System Interface PCB (FSD-A178) has failed.
Heading: Analogue Gyro Indicates an invalid analogue gyro input from the System Interface
214
Invalid PCB (FSD-A178).
USB: FSD-A232 Interface to Indicates that the USB interface between the Processor Unit and the
221
Input Relays failed input relays on the Relay Interface PCB (FSD-A232) has failed.
USB: FSD-A232 Interface to Indicates that the USB interface between the Processor Unit and the
222
Output Relays failed Output relays on the Radar Interface PCB (FSD-A232) has failed.
USB: FSD-A179 Interface to Indicates that the interface between the Processor Unit and the
231
Output Relays failed output relays on the Display Interface PCB (FSD-179) has failed.
Page 288 of 406

Position: Sensor failed. Using Indicates that the currently selected position sensor has failed and
261
DR that dead reckoning is being used.
Indicates that there has been a jump in position or a position drift
Position: DR drift limit
262 larger than the allowed limits. This indicates that the data from the
exceeded
position sensor could be unreliable.
Position: Fix needed to update Indicates that the system has been using dead reckoning for longer
263
DR than the time specified and requires a position fix by the user.
Position: Sensor failed. Indicates that the selected position sensor has failed and an
264
Reverted to alternative alternative sensor has been automatically selected.
Heading: Sensor failed. Indicates that the selected heading sensor has failed and an
265
Speed Log: Sensor failed. Indicates that the selected water speed log sensor has failed and an
266
Speed: Sensor failed. Indicates that the selected speed sensor has failed and an alternative
268
Reverted to alternative sensor has been automatically selected.
Indicates that the number of AIS targets displayed is 95% of the user
311 AIS: Targets nearing capacity
selected display capacity.
Indicates that the number of AIS targets has exceeded the user
312 AIS: Target capacity exceeded selected display capacity and some targets are therefore not
displayed.
ARPA: Tracked targets nearing Indicates that the number of tracked targets displayed is 95% of the
313
capacity maximum capacity.
Indicates that the maximum number of tracked targets has been
ARPA: Tracked target capacity
314 reached. Existing tracked targets must be deleted before further
exceeded
targets may be tracked.
315 ARPA: Lost tracked target Indicates that a tracked target has been lost.
316 ARPA: Lost reference target Indicates that a tracked reference target has been lost.
317 AIS: Lost AIS target Indicates that an AIS target has been lost.
Indicates that one or more tracked or AIS targets violate the CPA and
318 Collision warning
TCPA limits set, and may therefore be a collision risk.
Indicates that ownship’s position has moved by more than the limit
ARPA: Anchor watch limit
319 set since the anchor watch was started, based on the relative
exceeded
positions of all anchor watch tracked targets.
Indicates that the display has not detected the sync sugnal from the
361 Tx: No Sync
selected radar sensor.
Indicates that the display has not detected the azimuth signal from
362 Tx: No Azimuth
the selected radar sensor.
Indicates that the display has not detected the heading line signal
363 Tx: No Heading Line
from the selected radar sensor.
RIU: Unit Failed. Reverted to Indicates that the RIU has failed, and the display can only use the
364
default Tx default radar sensor.
Indicates that the RIU is available after having failed and that a radar
365 RIU: Unit now available
sensor other than the default one can now be selected.
Tx: SharpEye Rx sensitivity
366 Indicates a receiver sensitivity fault in the SharpEye radar sensor.
test failed
Tx: SharpEye Tx VSWR test
367 Indicates a VSWR test failure in the SharpEye radar sensor.
failed
Indicates that the Tx power output from a SharpEye radar sensor
368 Tx: SharpEye low Tx power
has been set to low.
Page 289 of 406

Tx: SharpEye hardware error Indicates a phase locked oscillator fault in the SharpEye radar
369
(PLO lock) sensor.
Tx: SharpEye hardware error
370 Indicates a hardware fault in the SharpEye radar sensor.
(synthesizer lock)
Tx: SharpEye over- Indicates that the SharpEye radar sensor has exceeded normal
371
temperature operating temperature and is operating on low power.
Tx: SharpEye over- Indicates that the SharpEye temperature has exceeded a second
372
temperature shutdown threshold and the radar sensor has therefore shut down.
Tx: SharpEye loss of Azimuth / Indicates that the SharpEye radar sensor is not receiving an
373
Heading Line azimuth or heading line signal.
Page 290 of 406

Chapter 8: Backup & restore
8 Backup & restore

Using backup and restore, data can be backed up and selected data can be
transferred between compatible MantaDigital processors.
Backup/ Restore is selected from the Set-Up area of the Standby screen.
Note: The restoration functions are used to restore user generated data. This cannot be
used for restoration or upgrading of the processor system software.
Antivirus warnings and precautions
WARNING:
MUST be fully scanned for viruses on a PC that has up to date anti-virus
software installed.
See section 2.6.4 for additional information on virus precautions and warnings.
Page 291 of 406

8.1 Backup data
The following data can be backed up/ saved to external media.
Backup function Description Availability
Configuration of sensors such as GPS, Gyro etc.

Ship & sensor data All systems
And all ownship’s settings
The configuration of all transmitters connected to
Transmitter configuration All systems
the system
Routes User created routes All systems
User maps User created maps All systems

Only relevant for
Chart permits Chart permits chart or ECDIS
enabled systems
Only relevant for
Past track The last 3 months of vessel tracks ECDIS enabled
systems
Only relevant for
A 12-hour log of own ship primary sensor data,
12 hour log ECDIS enabled
target data and current chart usage
systems
Network enabled
Networking configuration All the systems network settings
system
User profile data User profiles created and stored on the system All systems
Alarm configuration The configuration of the alarms setup page All systems
All SRM’s (Safety related messages) received and
AIS safety data All systems
not deleted by the user.
Only relevant for
All mariners NOTEs or events entered into the
Mariners objects ECDIS enabled
system.
systems
All data All relevant data is backed up. All systems
Page 292 of 406

Back-up data
Noting all antivirus warnings shown in this handbook, plug a USB memory stick to the
socket on the door of the MantaDigital processor unit and select the desired backup.
From the pop-up box, select the removable media.
In a normal system the drives are allocated as follows:

C: Main hard drive
D: CD/ DVD-Rom
If you are not in the correct drive, click on the ..\ symbol to go
up a level.
Select Backup.
When the backup is complete, ‘Backup restore action completed successfully’ will
appear on screen; click OK to continue.
4
Eject the memory stick BEFORE unplugging from the processor (see Eject removable
media later in this section).
8.2 System backup
The Backup All Data function within backup and restore saves all the system settings, user
generated data, permits and system configurations.
It is strongly recommended that a backup of all data from all MantaDigital systems is
taken regularly and retained with the systems for any possible service interventions.
Page 293 of 406

8.3 Restoring data
The following data can be restored to any MantaDigital processor allowing the transfer of
data between compatible systems.
Note: The restoration tab only restores user generated data. It cannot be used for
restoration or upgrading of the system software.
Backup function Description Availability
Routes User created routes All systems
User maps User created maps All systems
User profile data User profiles created and stored on the system All systems
All SRM’s (Safety related messages) received and
AIS safety data All systems
not deleted by the user.
Only relevant for
All mariners NOTEs or events entered into the
Mariners objects ECDIS enabled
system.
systems
Caution: Some restoration functions will force a system restart.

The restore function should only be used when the system is not
required for safe navigation.
Page 294 of 406

Restore data
Noting all antivirus warnings shown in this handbook, plug the media containing the backup
into the MantaDigital processor and select the desired restoration function.
From the pop-up box, select the removable media.
In a normal system the drives are allocated as follows:

C: Main hard drive
D: CD/ DVD-Rom
If you are not in the correct drive, click on the ..\ symbol to go
up a level.
Select Restore.
Depending on the restore function selected, the system may now prompt with ‘Registry
settings have been changed. An application restart will occur for the changes to take
effect’.
Click OK to proceed.
The system will shut down and restart
4
8.4 Backup file format
Each restoration file will be in the following format:
MD shipname 20110411 1535
The date (YYYY/MM/DD) that UTC time that the backup

MantaDigital The Vessel’s name
the backup was taken was taken
The contents and size of each file will change depending on the backup function selected.
Page 295 of 406

8.5 Export Debug Data
Debug data consists of system error log and screen grabs and is used by Kelvin Hughes to
analyse any issues with the equipment.
Caution: The export debug function should only be used when specifically
advised by Kelvin Hughes or one of our authorised agents.
Export Debug data

Noting all antivirus warnings shown in this handbook, plug a USB memory stick to the
socket on the door of the MantaDigital processor unit.
Select the Export Debug Data button.
WARNING: Only press the export debug button ONCE as repeated presses can incorrectly
transfer data to the memory stick.
Depending on the size of the file, this may take several minutes to complete.
When the export is complete the system will prompt with ‘Backup restore action
completed successfully’; click OK to continue.
4
Each debug file will be in the following format where the file name is the date and time that
the backup was made:
MD debug backup shipname 20110411 1535
WARNING
The Export Debug backup folder contains registry files that can only be used by
Kelvin Hughes Ltd.
Users should not attempt to open files contained in the debug backup or release
folders as they may corrupt the user’s computer
Page 296 of 406

8.6 Eject Removable Media
Before unplugging any removable media device, select ‘Eject removable media’.
This safely ejects the USB flash memory inserted into the system.
Page 297 of 406

Chapter 9: Chart maintenance
9 Chart maintenance
Chart maintenance allows the management of chart data, licenses and updates
The various functions are accessed by selecting the Chart Maintenance icon in the
Standby Activities area of the standby screen:
If the Chart maintenance section is ‘greyed-out’ or cannot be

accessed there may be a problem with the eToken or chart
maintenance has not been enabled in optional features.
See index entry for eToken software or optional features for

additional details.
The chart maintenance section comprises of the following chapters:
Chapter 9.1: Chart Maintenance: Overview.

An overview of the tabs found in chart maintenance.
Chapter 9.2: Functions common to all tabs.

Details the functions and controls that are common to each tab within chart maintenance.
Chapter 9.3: How do I…?

Step by step instructions for common activities within chart maintenance such as loading
permits and charts.
Page 298 of 406

9.1 Chart maintenance – an overview
Chart maintenance allows the management (installation and updating) of charts and chart
permits for systems that are Chart Radar and/ or ECDIS enabled.
The MantaDigital Chart Radar and ECDIS system is capable of displaying the following
charts:
 IHO/ IC-ENC S-57 Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) vector based charts.
 IHO/ IC-ENC S-63 Encrypted ENCs as supplied by Primar Stavanger, UK Admiralty

ENC service and other hydrographic offices.
 C-Map vector based charts including Professional, Professional+ and C-Map ENC.
Note: There are no facilities for installing or displaying Raster Navigation

charts.
When opened, the Chart maintenance section comprises of 6 tabs as follows:
Chart View: This tab is used to view and update installed charts and is also used to
install new charts. Routes can be loaded and charts to be used on the
route may be selecte.
Data View: This tab is used to view details of installed charts and charts on
external media (e.g. CD or DVD). The data on external media can be
selected for installation and installed data selected for deletion.
Install Log: Shows the progress of chart installations or updates.
Chart License: This tab allows the installation and management of chart licenses.
View updates: Installed updates can be viewed and manual updates applied.
Colour calibration: This tab is used to view the various colour palettes used in chart radar
and ECDIS modes.
Page 299 of 406

9.1.1 Chart view tab
The chart view tab is used to view chart data that is installed or is available on removable
media such as CD, DVD or USB flash memory.
The installed chart database is shown in the top left hand side of the screen (Installed). A
database must be selected for the chart data to be viewed.
In no chart database is selected, no chart information or cell boundaries will be seen

on the display.
The Data shown in the chart view tab is also dependent on the filter settings selected on the
right hand side of the screen (filters).
Cell boundary colours
In chart view, cell boundaries are displayed in different colours that represent the following:
Cell outlined in GREEN: The cell is installed.
Cell outlined in BLUE: The cell is available on the external media and has a valid
permit.
Cell outlined in RED: The cell is available on external media but no permit is
installed
Page 300 of 406

9.1.2 Data view tab
Media Column Installed Column
The data view tab shows chart data that is available to install from external media (Media
column) and chart data that is already installed (Installed column).
The permit status of individual cells can be viewed and cells selected, installed and
uninstalled.
If no chart database is selected, no chart data will be seen on the display.
The Data shown in the data view tab is also dependent on the filter settings selected on the
right hand side of the screen (filters).
Each cell edition/ update number and date can be viewed by using the +/- buttons next to
each cell.
Switch from Data View to Chart View
Click on any
data to switch
to chart view
tab where the
selected cell Data view
will be shown.
Chart view
Page 301 of 406

Data view tab: Media Column – an overview
The following example shows a group of cells available on external media.
An expanded cell showing the edition

number/ issue date and an update number
with its issue date (the edition and update
details are only shown where base data is
installed).
The cell is on a dark blue background
indicating the permit is valid.
The cell is available for installation.
An expanded cell highlighted in light blue

indicating that there is no permit.
The cell cannot be installed.
Select ALL:
Selects all cells on the external media.
Select Updates
Selects cells on the media that have
updates.
New base cells are NOT installed using
this function
Deselect ALL
Deselects all cells
Export Chart List

This function is currently not enabled.
Invalid update(s)
If a cell is highlight in dark red then the update is invalid. Invalid Updates are those charts
that are installed, but the update cannot be installed either because the software version is
not supported, or a previous update was not correctly installed.
Note: Charts selected or de-selected in Data View will also be selected or de-selected in
the Chart View tab, i.e. a chart ticked in Data View will be highlighted when Chart View is
selected and vice versa.
Page 302 of 406

Data view tab: Installed Column – an overview
The following example shows a group of installed cells selected.
An expanded cell showing the edition

number/ issue date and an update
number with its issue date (the edition
and update details are only shown where
base data is installed).
The cell is on a dark blue background
indicating the permit is currently valid.
Select All Installed

Selects all installed cells.
Deselect ALL
Deselects all cells
Uninstall selected
Removes all selected cells from the
system.
Expired permit(s)
Where a permit for a cell has expired, the cell will be highlighted in dark red.
Page 303 of 406

9.1.3 Install Log
The Install Log tab show the progress and results of a chart installation or update. During
installation a progress bar is shown and the current installation is shown in the status field.
On completion of an installation the status box shows Database Installation Complete. A

list of the data installed and a results field is shown which can be expanded/ contracted
using the +/- button.
Page 304 of 406

Installation errors
When an installation is complete any errors

that occurred during the installation are
shown
If no errors occur, the S63 Decryption results

box is not shown.
Open Log File
The Open Log File button opens a Chart Installation Log File which is a log of all chart
maintenance activities such as installations, updates and deletions.
Page 305 of 406

9.1.4 Chart License tab
The chart license tab allows the installation and management of chart permits.
The Chart License tab can be broken

down into 5 sub sections as follows:
Installation of permits is covered in the ‘how do I…’ section.
Page 306 of 406

9.1.5 View updates tab
The view updates tab is used for:
Manually updating chart data
• Information can be manually inserted onto chart data.

• Existing chart features can be edited.
Reviewing official updates
• Information on official updates applied to chart data can be viewed.
Updating and reviewing charts is covered in the ‘how do I…’ section.
Page 307 of 406

9.1.6 Colour Calibration tab
The colour calibration tab is used as part of the factory approval process for the MantaDigital
system. During approval, calibrated luminance and colour sensing test equipment is used to
check the colour of the display.
The Colour calibration is not used as during normal operation of the MantaDigital processor
but can be used as a visual ‘quick check’ that all greyscale shades and colours are being
displayed.
It should be noted that the identification of greyscale shades and display colours will vary
according to the operator, so should not be considered as a quantitative test.
When the Single Colour palette has been selected, each colour can be selected and viewed
by left clicking any of the lines of text. Selecting List all S52 colours expands the list to show
all colours used in S52 charts.
Page 308 of 406

Black adjust selected Grey scale selected
Colour Differentiation selected Single colour selected
With one of the four the colour test modes selected and with the cursor placed over the
centre of the screen, the following cursor options are available:
Left Middle Right
Normal Full With Full No

Window Border border
Switches
between Switches to
Switches to
normal view full screen
full screen
and without
with border
Full with border
border view
Normal view Full screen with border Full screen without border
The above shows examples with the Gray scale colour test mode selected
Note: When ‘Full with no border’ or ‘Full without border’ has been
selected, pressing the left button (Normal Window) returns the display to
the chart maintenance/ colour calibration tab.
Page 309 of 406

9.2 Common functions within chart maintenance
The following pages detail functions that are common to all tabs within chart maintenance.
Selectable tabs
Common Common
functions functions
9.2.1 Installed
Installed: Shows a list of chart databases installed on the system.
A chart database is a collection of cells from a data provider; for example UKHO, AVCS or
other chart provider.
Note: When Chart Maintenance is opened no databases are

selected so no cell boundaries will appear in the Chart view tab.
Example 1: The C-Map professional+ database is ticked and expanded to show the issue number.
Installed C-Map cell boundaries are show in the Chart View tab.
Page 310 of 406

Uninstall button
Uninstall is used to remove/ uninstall the complete contents of a selected database. This can
be used if a new source of charts is to be used.
WARNING: The Uninstall function permanently deletes ALL data from the
selected database.
Select the chart database to be permanently deleted
Press Uninstall
The system will prompt with a warning asking if you

wish to delete the selected database.
Yes: Permanently deletes the selected database.

No: Cancels the action.
Check Chart Update status button:
The Check Chart Update status button is used to view the current update status of all
installed charts.
The system checks installed data against a file called ‘xxxProducts’ where xxx is the chart
supplier (see examples on following page).
When you browse chart media, the ‘xxx products’ file is automatically loaded onto the
system.
Page 311 of 406

9.2.2 Media
Media: This section is used to browse, install and update chart data from CD, DVD or USB
flash memory.
Insert the CD, DVD or USB flash drive into the system and press Browse; the system will
search for chart data.
Once the system has detected the source of data, pressing the Select button produces a list
of the data that is available.
The Select button will show the name of the selected data.
Example of an AVCS Base CD
When a disk is loaded, the following options are available when the select button is perssed:
In the following ‘xxx’ is the chart supplier e.g. Primar, C-Map AVCS etc.
xxx ENC: Shows the contents/ cell boundaries available on the inserted media.
xxx Products: Shows the global coverage/ cell boundaries and any updates that are
available. The region covered by the media can be installed however,
if you attempt to install data for a region not covered, the system will
request the appropriate CD/ media.
Clear Selection: Clears the cell boundaries/ media contents from the chart view and
data view tabs.
Page 312 of 406

9.2.3 Chart control (zoom, reposition & select cells)
The scale of the chart can be adjusted as follows:
With the cursor placed over the Scale button, the

Left Middle Right
For a full description of the scale button, its features and the ‘traffic light’ indicator, see
section 6.5: Chart Scales and position.
Page 313 of 406

9.2.4 Manual Zoom, selecting cells and reposition
Manual Zoom:
With the cursor placed over the chart presentation area, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right

To manually zoom into the chart, place the
cursor in the desired position then press and
Select Deselect Reposition
hold the RIGHT button (reposition).
Selects the
De-selects Centers the With the right button pressed, roll the
the chart chart on the
chart cell(s)
cell(s) at the current
trackerball and a magenta coloured box can
at the cursor be dragged over the required chart area. The
cursor cursor
position
position position cursor shows the GPS extent of the zoom
area.
Release the button and the chart will zoom to
the selected area.
Left Middle Right
Cancel End Drag

Zoom Zoom
Centers the
chart on the
Cancels the
No Function current
zoom
cursor
position
Single cell boundary selection:
Place the cursor within the required cell and left click, the cell boundary becomes bold
indicating that it has been selected. When a cell boundary is selected, all boundaries that
enclose that point will also be selected. For example; if you select a cell boundary for
berthing, the other levels (overview, costal etc) will also be selected.
To select an individual boundary, use the filters to select the layers that are not required.
Single cell boundary de-selection:
Individual cells can be deselected by placing the cursor over the cell and pressing the middle
(Deselect) button.
Page 314 of 406

Group selection and de-selection of cell boundaries:
Cells can be individually selected using the left hand (select) and middle (Deselect) buttons:
Note: When a cell or group of cells are selected in chart view they
are also selected in the data view tab
Note: this function only works when selecting cells from external media such as CD, DVD or
USB flash drives.
Group Select
With the cursor placed in the chart area, press and hold the LEFT button and drag the cursor
across the required cells. The cursor shows the latitude & longitude coordinates of of the
zoom area and an orange coloured box can be dragged over the required chart area. All
cells within the orange zoom will be selected.
Selected Cells are shown in BOLD
Not selected Cell boundaries selected
Group deselect
With the cursor placed in the chart area, press and hold the MIDDLE button and drag the
cursor across the required cells. The cursor shows the latitude & longitude coordinates of the
zoom area and an orange coloured box can be dragged over the required chart area. All
cells within the orange zoom will be deselected.
Deselect ALL/ Reset Selected
All selected cell boundaries can be deselected using

the reset selected button
Reposition
Pressing the reposition button centers the chart on the current cursor position.
Page 315 of 406

9.2.5 Filters
The level of cell boundaries that are viewed in the Chart view and Data View tabs can be set
using the filters. When a filter is set, it changes the view in both tabs.
Display (Show/ hide) Selected or Non-Selected cell boundaries.
Show selected cell

boundaries only
Selected cell boundaries

are shown with bold
outlines.
Non-Selected cell
boundaries are not shown.
Show non-selected cell

boundaries only
Non-Selected cell
boundaries are shown.
Selected cell boundaries

are NOT shown.
Page 316 of 406

Display (Show/ hide) cell boundaries depending on permit status
Chart installed
Installed chart data is

shown.
Cell boundaries are

outlined in GREEN.
New chart with permit
Charts from external media

that have valid permits are
shown.
This includes charts that do not
require permits (S57 data).
Cell boundaries are

outlined in BLUE.
New chart without permit
Charts from external media

that DO NOT HAVE
permits are shown.
Cell boundaries are

outlined in RED.
Page 317 of 406

Display (Show/ hide) cell boundaries by usage level
Usage level.
The above filers can be

selected or deselected as
required.
The cell boundary color

depends on the permit.
If all display levels are

Background, overview, general, coastal and approach filters deselected. deselected, no cell
boundaries will be
displayed on screen.
Page 318 of 406

9.2.6 Routes in Chart view tab
A route can be loaded in chart maintenance and the cells that the route passes through can
be selected.
With the cursor over the Route button, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Select Main Show/ Hide Deselect

Route Route Route
Select a Deselect the

Show or hide
route loaded route
the route
(see route (see route
(does not
management management
deselect the
in section in section
route)
6.38) 6.38)
Select Charts on Route

With a route loaded, pressing Select Charts On Route will select all chart data along the
path of the route.
Left Middle Right
Select Route
Charts
Loads cells
along the
route are
selected
Example of a charts
being selected along a
loaded route.
The selected charts are

shown in BOLD
Page 319 of 406

Reset selected
Pressing Reset Selected clears all cell boundaries that have been selected.
Left Middle Right
Reset
Selected
Clears all
selected cell No Function No Function
boundaries
9.2.7 Brilliance control/ chart settings / StandBy
This section of the display controls the screen colour palette, chart settings alarm messages,
screen capture and access to the standby screen.
These functions are common to the radar and ECDIS modes:
Daylight Chart settings Standby
Allows the selection of Configuration of the chart Exits Chart maintenance and
Daylight, Dusk or Night. display. returns the system to the
The button name changes to standby screen.
reflect the palette selected.
Additional details: Additional details: Capture Screen

See chapter 6.55.5 See chapter 6.8 for details on Also allows a screen capture
For addition instructions and the General/ Advanced and to be taken (see fault finding
warnings. query tabs available in chart section for additional
settings. information)
Page 320 of 406

9.3 How do I…
The following section lists the permit, chart installation and update procedures.
These are listed in a ‘how do I…?’ format.
The sections have been designed so that

individual pages can be printed and kept
with the system as quick reference guides.
The following topics are listed in this section:
Section Procedure.
3.9.1 Locating the chart permit and eToken number
3.9.2 Preparing a license / permit for installation
3.9.3 Automatically load a permit
3.9.4 Manually loading C-Map permits
3.9.5 Manually loading permits from a file or folder
3.9.6 Viewing and deleting ENC permits
3.9.7 View and install IHO certificate and public key
3.9.8 Re-initialise eToken (see warnings in section)
3.9.9 Install base data or world chart
3.9.10 Checking the update status of data
3.9.11 Applying updates
3.9.12 Viewing updates
3.9.13 Manual updates
Page 321 of 406

9.3.1 Locate my chart permit and eToken number
In Chart Maintenance, select the

Chart License tab
2
The eToken and User Permit
numbers are displayed in the
ENC licenses section.
Page 322 of 406

9.3.2 Prepare to load a permits or charts
Preparation of permits:
ENC and C-Map licenses will be issued by a chart provider and may have instruction on
preparing the licenses for installation.
Observing all antivirus precautions, ensure the chart providers instructions are fully followed
prior to use.
Where do I insert a CD/ DVDs or USB device containing permits or charts?
USB flash memory

Virus free memory sticks can be
plugged into the socket located
on the right hand side of the
MantaDigital processor door.
CD’s and DVD

Are placed into a DVD-ROM
drive located behind the small
door on the front of the
processor.
The access flap must be

unlocked and opened to gain
access to the CD/ DVD drive
Other considerations
• For permit installation, it is recommended that no other files are present on the
removable media as this can slow down the permit installation.
• It is also recommended that users familiarise themselves with the chart maintenance
pages as detailed in sections 9.1 and 9.2
Page 323 of 406

9.3.3 Automatically load a permit
Automatic license installation will search all removable media (CD, DVD and USB flash
memory) for ENC/ C-Map permits.
Prepare the permit as shown in

section 9.3.2
Remove any base or update CD’s

from the DVD-Rom drive.
Open Chart Maintenance and select

the Chart License tab
Press Auto install licenses from

removable media
2
The system will automatically detect
and display any licenses on the
removable media:
 ENC permits will show as:

Permit.txt
 C-Map permits will show as:
Password.usr
Note: All files found on the removable media
that end in .txt or .usr will be shown in the
dialogue box.
3
In Chart License – available files,
click on the required permit (permit.txt
or password.usr).
The selected permit will be installed.
4
When permit installation is complete,
a dialogue box opens displaying a list
of the permits installed.
Press Close to exit the permit results

and return to the Chart license tab.
5
Return to the Stand-By screen before
loading any charts.
Page 324 of 406

9.3.4 Manually loading permits for C-Map zones or areas
For Automatic loading of C-Map permits, see section 9.3.3; automatically load a permit.

Place the cursor on the button marked

Select located below the C-Map
licenses text, and a list of installed C-
Map databases is displayed.
2
Select the required C-Map database.
3
A list of C-Map zones is now
presented.
The expiry date of the current license

is also shown.
Select the required Zone and area.

The selected zone is displayed below
the list.
4
Using the keyboard, enter the C-Map
licence for the Zone/ Area in the
License String box and press Enter.
Press Add Manual Licence to add

the licence to the system.
5
loading any charts.
Page 325 of 406

Possible errors during manual entry of C-Map license(s)
Unable to add license.

The installation has failed due to
an error which could be:
 Incorrect Zone/ area

selected.
 Incorrect permit entered
Reselect the zone/ area and re-

enter the permit. If this fails
please contact you chart
supplier and confirm the license
is correct.
Please enter a license string

A zone/ area has been selected
but a license number has not
entered in License String
Please enter a zone/ area

A zone has not been selected
for the permit.
Select the appropriate zone/

area and re-enter the permit.
License string needs to be …

The permit number has been
entered incorrectly. Recheck the
zone/ area and re-enter the
number.
If this fails please contact you
chart supplier and confirm the
license is correct.
Page 326 of 406

9.3.5 Manually load a permit from file
For Automatic loading of permits see section 9.3.3; automatically load a permit.
C-Map and ENC permits can be manually installed as follows:
Prepare the permit as shown in

section 9.3.2

2
CD/DVD’s or USB flash memory can
be explored using the display window
below the Add license from file
button.
In a normal system the drives are

allocated as follows:

C: Main hard drive
D: CD/ DVD-Rom
If you are not in the correct drive, click

on the ..\ symbol to go up a level.
3
Using the display window, locate and
select the required permit(s).
 ENC permits will show as: Permit.txt

 C-Map permits will show as:
Password.usr
When a permit is selected it is shown

below the display window.
4
Press Add license from file and the
selected permit will be installed.
5
loading any charts.
Page 327 of 406

9.3.6 View and delete ENC permits
1
In Chart Maintenance, select the
Chart License tab
2
Select the View/ Delete Installed
ENC Permits button.
3
Select the Data Server ID required.
GB = UKHO
PR = Primar
AU = Austrian/ Seafarer
etc
All installed cells and their individual

expiry date can be viewed
Select All: Selects all installed

permits. Selected cells are highlighted
in light blue.
Deselect All: Deselects the user

selection. Shift key
Delete selected: Permanently deletes

the selected permits.
Group select: Select a permit, press

and hold the shift key on the keyboard
and select the last permit required.
Control key: When a group is

selected, individual permits can be Selecting cells or groups of cells
added by pressing and holding the
control (Ctrl) key whilst selecting the
desired permit.
If permits have been deleted, return to

the standby screen prior to carry out
any further chart maintenance
activities.
Page 328 of 406

9.3.7 View or install IHO Certificates and/ or public keys
The IHO S63 data encryption scheme provides licensing for vector charts. The scheme
requires the installation of a public key from the scheme administrator (IHO) and a certificate
file.
MantaDigital systems are supplied with these certificates pre-installed so it should not be
necessary to re-install the certificate or key.
The certificate and public key can be viewed and, in the event of accidental deletion or
overwriting, re-installed.
Copies of the certificate and public key cab be obtained from Kelvin Hughes or downloaded
from the IHO website at www.iho.shom.fr
Note: Kelvin Hughes is not responsible for the content of external web sites.
View the IHO certificate
1
2
Select the View Installed Certificate
and Public Key button
3
The Digital Certificate and Public key
data is displayed.
The Public Key data must correspond

exactly with the ‘Big y’ data that can
be viewed on the original certificate.
Page 329 of 406

Re-install the IHO Certificate and

Public Key
1
2
Obtain a copy of the IHO certificates.
The files required are:
IHO.CRT (IHO certificate)

IHO.PUB (Public key)
Copy the certificates to a virus free

USB flash memory stick and insert
this into the system.
IMPORTANT: Remove all CD’s or

DVD’s from the DVD-Rom drive.
3
Select the Install certificate from
removable media button
The system will browse for the

IHO.CRT file
Click on the IHO.CRT file and the

system will install the certificate.
A notification will appear when the

installation is complete.
4
Select the Install Public Key from
removable media button
The system will browse for the

IHO.PUB file
Click on the IHO.PUB file and the

system will install the certificate.

installation is complete.
After the certificates have been

installed, return to the Stand-By
screen before loading any charts.
Page 330 of 406

9.3.8 Re initialise eToken
The re-initialise eToken function should only be used in the following circumstances:
 An official replacement eToken has been provided by Kelvin Hughes or a Kelvin Hughes
authorised agent.
 The eToken has accidently been swapped with a grouped eToken from another
processor on the bridge.
Unless specifically advised by Kelvin Hughes Ltd, there are no other circumstances
where the re-initialise eToken button should be used.
Caution: Re-initialising the eToken deletes all permits. If the eToken is

re-initialised, all chart permits will have to be reinstalled.
1
2
Ensure the correct eToken is inserted
into the processor.
3
Press the Re-initialise eToken button
4
The system will prompt with the
warning that licenses will be lost if the
eToken is re-initialised.
5
initialisation is complete.
ALL chart permits must now be

reinstalled.
Page 331 of 406

9.3.9 Install the contents of a Base CD
Open Chart Maintenance.
Ensure the relevant permits are

installed.
Insert the media to be loaded and press

Browse.
Select the C-Map database or ENC

exchange set to be loaded.
2
Select the Data View tab.
Press the Select ALL button in the

Media column
De-select the following filters:

 Chart Installed
 New Chart Without Permit
(De-selecting the above prevents the system
trying to install cells that do not have permits).
All cells on the media that have a valid

permit are selected and are ready to be
installed. The chart data can be viewed
in the Chart View tab.
3
Press Install.

approximate installation time.
WARNING: Depending on permit coverage,
installation of a base CD can take a number
of hours. During installation the system
cannot be used for navigational purposes.
Press OK to commence the installation

of all cells.
Page 332 of 406

ENC base and C-Map world data

CD’s (continued)
4
The Install Log tab is automatically
selected and a progress bar shown. A
list the cells is displayed as they are
installed.
The Status box at the bottom of tab

shows the current activity.
5
When the installation is complete, a
pop-up box shows any issues that
may have occurred during the
installation.
In the Status box, the system will

show Database Installation
Complete.
The results of all current and previous

installations can be viewed by
pressing the Open Log File button.
A list of installation dates is displayed

which can be expanded and collapsed
using the +/- symbol to see what data
was installed and any problems
encountered.
6
On completion of the installation,
remove the media and return to the
Standby screen.
Updates
Updates contained on base CD’s/ media are automatically installed.
STOP the installation

Chart installation should not be stopped or interrupted. In an emergency, returning to the
Standby screen will stop the installation.
Warning: Returning to the Standby stops the installation and NO

cells are installed. CMap databases may be permanently deleted
and will need complete reinstallation.
Page 333 of 406

9.3.10 Check the update status of charts
The status of installed charts can be checked using the Check Chart Update Status button.
1
Open Chart Maintenance.
Press the Check Chart Update Status

button.
Note: It is NOT necessary to select a chart

database prior to pressing the Check Chart
Update Status button.
If the system has not been checked

before or a new database has been
installed, the following warning will be
displayed:
“Products list is not available. Please
browse the latest media”.
Where this warning appears, place the
latest chart media (base or update) into
the system and press Browse.
Browsing the media will automatically
install the required file.
3
In systems where the a products list
has been loaded the system will display
the following:
The chart data will be checked to xxx
If newer media is available please insert
and browse before checking.
(xxx is the last update applied e.g. AVCS
25/08/2011).
To check the chart status press Yes
To cancel the operation press No
Note: If chart media inserted into the

system and is older that the last update,
the system will warn that:
Products Data is older that the installed
ENC data. Please browse the newest
ENC media.
To correct this, insert and Browse the
latest media.
Page 334 of 406

4
If all installed cells are up to date, the
system will display the following:
All charts are up to date at DD/MM/YYYY

(Where the date shown is the date of the All installed cells up to date
last update).
5
If any cells are not up to date, the
system shows a list of cells that need
updating.
The list shows:

Data Server: Allows the selection of
other databases that may
be loaded.
Cell: The cell number
Installed: The edition and update
number of the installed cell.
Available: The edition and update
number of the available
update.
Reason: A brief description of the
required action (chart
needs updating etc)
See the following section on how to

update chart data.
Page 335 of 406

9.3.11 Apply updates
Chart updates are installed as follows:
Caution: For successful updating of chart data, the update media must be
INSTALLED and then UPDATED as shown below.
Failure to install the update media prior to updating will cause issues with
subsequent updates.
Open Chart Maintenance and insert

the relevant update media.
2
Install the update media using the
instructions found in section 9.3.9 (How
to install the contents of a base CD).
It is essential that the update media

is installed BEFORE using the select
updates button.
3
When the data from the update media
has been installed, press Browse again
and reselect the C-Map database or
ENC exchange set to be loaded.
3
Select the Data View tab.
Press the Select Updates button in the

Media column
De-select the following filters:

 Chart Installed
(De-selecting the above filters prevents the
system trying to install cells without permits).
All data on the update media that has a

valid permit is selected.
Page 336 of 406

Apply updates (continued)
Press Install.

approximate installation time.
5
During installation of updates, the
Install Log tab is automatically
selected showing a progress bar. A
list of cells is shown as they are
updated.
The Status box at the bottom of the

tab shows the current activity.
6
When the update is complete, a pop-
up box shows any issues that may
have occurred during the update.
In the Status box, the system will

show Database Installation
Complete.
The results of all current and previous

installations can be viewed by
pressing the Open Log File button.
A list of installation dates is displayed

and can be expanded/ collapsed
using the +/- symbol to see what data
was installed and any problems
encountered.
8
Repeat the above process for ALL
UPDATE data supplied by the chart
provider.
Page 337 of 406

9.3.12 View updates
1
the View Update tab.
At the bottom of the screen, select the

Review Official Updates tab.
Caution: In the filters, ensure that Charts

installed is selected. If this is not selected, the
Cells drop down list will be empty
2
Use the Agency button to select the
region for the required chart update.
3
List Updates Since is used to filter the
updates by date. To adjust the date,
place the cursor over the day, month or
year and use the trackerball to scroll
up/ down to adjust to the desired date.
Note: Whilst the system is switched ON the

date configured is retained in memory. The
date should be checked each time view
updates is used.
4
Using the Cell button select the cell to
be viewed.
The selected cell is displayed with a list

of updates filtered by the date set in
List Updates Since.
Page 338 of 406

When a cell has been selected, the box

containing updates can be expanded or
contracted
6
Left Middle Right
With the cursor over the Zoom button,
the zoom options shown are available. Zoom IN Overview Zoom OUT
The chart can also be expanded using

the drag-zoom facility. Zooms into Shows the Zoom out
the selected selected from the
cell cell selected cell
7
Select an update and the update is
shown on the corresponding cell. The
area of the update is outlined with a
flashing orange pentagon.
The information on each update can be

expanded/ contracted using the +/-
symbol.
8
The level of detail shown on a cell can
be configured using the Chart Settings
button
See chapter 6.8 for details on the

General/ Advanced and query tabs
available in chart settings.
Page 339 of 406

9.3.13 Manual updates
1
the View Update tab.
At the bottom of the screen, select the

Manual Updates tab.
Ensure the following filters are

SELECTED (ticked)
 Chart Installed
(If these are not selected, updates may not be
displayed).
2
Use the Agency button to select the
region for the required chart update.
3
Using the Cell button select the
required cell.
The selected cell is displayed outlined

in green.
When the cursor is on the chart area it

shows the Lat and Lon position and a
text label MU indicating that Manual
Update has been selected.
To add a new update:

Select Insert New Feature and the
Select Feature to Insert box will open.
See later in this section for editing/ deleting an

existing chart feature or update.
Page 340 of 406

5
Use the Select Feature to Insert box
to select the manual update type
required.
In the following example Dangers /

Breakers has been selected
6
When a feature has been selected, the
Set Attributes tab automatically opens.
Depending on the feature selected,

each attribute can be modified to reflect
the data required for the manual
update.
As an example, when Category of

water turbulence is selected, a drop
down list is available where breakers
can be selected.
Additionally in this example, when

Information is selected a text can be
entered to reflect the data required for
the manual update.
7
When all data for the update has been
entered, press Insert and use the
cursor to place the update at the
required position.
Page 341 of 406

8
For single object such as aids to
navigation, a single click will drop the
update at the required cursor position
(the position can be ‘fine tuned’ later in
the process).
For objects that have to be drawn, a left

click is used to place/ draw the object
and a middle or right click is used to
end the edit.
9
When an object is placed on screen, it
is also shown in a drop down list in the
manual updates tab.
The dropdown list can be used to

select, open and edit each item.
9
When an object is selected from the
drop down list, the Select Object to
Edit/ Delete box opens.
EDIT:
Select the feature to be edited and
press Edit Selected. A new box
appears called Set Attribute to Edit.
Delete:
Select the feature to be deleted and
press Delete Selected. The selected
feature is deleted from the chart
database.
Using the Set Attribute to Edit box,

the position of the selected feature can
be adjusted.
To adjust the position place the cursor

over the Lat or Lon position and use the
trackerball to scroll up/ down to adjust
to the desired value.
Page 342 of 406

Chapter 10: Optional Features
10 Optional Features
Optional features:
The optional features menu allows additional functionality to be enabled or disabled.
Additional modes can be applied for, purchased and enabled by email or phone; expired
optional feature can also be renewed.
eToken:
The optional features are directly linked to the systems eToken.
If the eToken is removed, all optional features are disabled and the Optional Features menu
cannot be accessed until the eToken is replaced in the system.
Example of a standby screen with NO eToken is fitted
Trial period
On new equipment some optional features have a 6-month trial period installed (enhanced
Target Detection for example).
When the trial period expires, the feature is disabled and a license has to be purchased for
continued use.
Page 343 of 406

10.1 Optional Features overview
The optional features menu is opened by

selecting the optional Features from the
standby screen.
The systems unique eToken number is

shown at the top of the MantaDigital Optional
Mode Management box.
The eToken number is different for each

processor.
Single Radar Display Automatically enabled for radar systems

Dual Radar Display Automatically enabled for radar systems
Automatically enabled for chart radar
Chart radar
systems
Automatically enabled for ECDIS
ECDIS
systems
Harbour Approach & Pilotage Display Automatically enabled for HAP systems
Enabled for a 6 month trial period on any
Enhanced Target Detection
system that has radar enabled
Automatically enabled for chart radar
Route Planning
and ECDIS systems
Simulation Automatically enabled for radar systems
ECDIS Radar Interlay Not enabled as standard.
Demonstration mode Not available as a user option.
Page 344 of 406

10.2 How do I…
10.2.1 Obtain prices for optional features?
Some processors have optional features enabled as standard. The enabling of non-standard
features is chargeable.
Optional Features can be enabled until a specific date or made permanent.
To find the cost of an optional feature, please contact Kelvin Hughes Ltd/ commercial
technical advice using the telephone number or email address shown at the bottom of the
Standby screen.
You will need to advise the following information:
 The optional feature(s) required

 The eToken number of the system
Non essential but useful information:

 Serial number of the processor (Not the display)
 Software version of the processor which can be found at the top of the standby
screen
CAUTION
Licenses can be requested and installed using a USB memory
stick.
All memory devices must be scanned to ensure they are virus free
prior to connection and use with any Kelvin Hughes equipment.
Any virus entering the system through a user device(s) will void all
warranties made by Kelvin Hughes, resulting in applicable service
charges.
Page 345 of 406

10.2.2 Enable optional features using email
Optional features are chargeable.

A purchase order will be required
to process the application of non
standard optional features.
Insert a virus free USB memory

device into the USB socket on the
front door of the MantaDigital
processor.
From the standby screen, select

Optional Features.
2
In the MantaDigital Optional
Mode Management table, select
the function required and place
the cursor over the Status
column.
Select Enable
Set an expiry date by clicking in

the date field. The format must
be DD/MM/YYYY (Day / Month /
Year).
If no expiry date is required,
right click on the date field
automatically selects Permanent.
Select Create Request.
The system will write a file to the

USB flash memory called
eTxxxxx.req, where xxxxx is the
eToken number
Email the file (approximate file

size is 500b) to Kelvin Hughes,
who will process the request and
return a file called eTxxxxx.fun.
This is loaded into the system

using the Import File function.
Page 346 of 406

4
Copy the eTxxxxx.fun file onto a
virus free USB memory device
and plug this into the
MantaDigital Processor.
Select Import File. The system

will automatically find and install
the file
There are no confirmation

messages but, the required
optional feature should now be
enabled and be available for use.
10.2.3 Enable an optional feature by phone
It is recommended that requests for optional features are made using email. However, if no
email or USB memory stick is available, optional features can be manually requested and
enabled using the Enter KHKey function as follows:
Enable the required optional features as shown in the previous section.
Contact Kelvin Hughes Ltd/ Commercial technical advice using the telephone number
shown at the bottom of the Standby screen.
The following information will be required:

 eToken number (requests CANNOT be processed without this number).
 Optional feature(s) that are currently enabled
 New optional feature(s) that have been enabled as part of this process.
 The expiry date or whether a feature has been made Permanent.
2
Kelvin Hughes will process your enquiry and then advise a KHKey code. This will be in the
form of a four digit pin number.
3
Using Enter KHKey, enter the number provided and click Accept.
After inserting the correct license key, the desired functionally will be released.
Caution: You have a limited number of attempts at entering the KHKey. If an incorrect
KHKey is entered too many times, a warning will appear noting that there are limited
attempts left. Continued attempts at entering an incorrect KHKEY will lock the system
and stop all optional features from working.
This would not stop the system running and radar modes can still be used.
Page 347 of 406

10.2.4 Renew a license for an existing optional feature
Where an optional feature has an expiry date or a trail period is about to run out, the system
will show warnings noting that the optional feature is about to expire.
Warnings are shown at 30, 14, 7 days and 24 hours prior to the license expiring. Once a
license has expired no further warnings are presented and the optional feature will be
disabled.
A new license can be purchased using any of the two methods noted in the previous
sections.
10.2.5 Unlock optional features
You have a limited number of attempts at entering a KHKey. If an incorrect KHKey is entered
too many times, a warning will appear noting that there are limited attempts left.
Continued attempts at entering an incorrect KHKEY will lock the system and stop all
optional features from working.
In normal operation, the Unlock

key is not available for use.
Where a system has been

locked, the unlock key becomes
available.
2
To unlock the system press the
unlock button and make a
careful note of the unique number
that is presented.
Contact Kelvin Hughes/

Commercial technical advice
quoting this number and they will
respond with an unlock code that
is entered using the Enter KHKey
button.
10.2.6 Use current settings?
The Current Settings button resets the optional features selection page to the last saved
configuration. This can be used to clear the screen if an error is made whilst enabling or
disabling a feature or setting a date.
Using this button does not delete KHKey’s or licenses that have been previously installed.
Page 348 of 406

Chapter 11: Route planning
11Route planning
Route planning allows the creation, safety checking and management of routes
The various functions are accessed by selecting the Route Planning icon in the Standby
Activities area of the standby screen:
If Route Planning is ‘greyed-out’ or cannot be accessed there

may be a problem with the eToken or Route Planning has not
been enabled in optional features.

additional details.
The Route planning section comprises of the following chapters:
Chapter 11.1: Route Planning: Overview.

An overview of the route planning page.
Chapter 11.2: Common functions.

Details the functions and controls that are common in route planning such as placing and
dropping WP’s, chart settings etc.
Chapter 11.3: How do I…?

Step by step instructions for common activities within route planning such as: Creating new
routes, safety checking, editing routes etc.
Page 349 of 406

11.1 Route planning overview
The Route planning screen can be broken down into three sections:
2 3
Chart display area

1 The level of information shown on the
chart can be configured using the Chart
Settings button.
Route can be created directly onto the

display area.
Route creation tools

2 Functions include creation, editing safety
checking and management of routes.
Screen controls
The screen palette, zoom levels, chart
3
feature levels can be configured.
The Standby button exits route planning

and returns the display to the standby
screen.
11.2 Common functions
There are a number of common cursor functions in route planning for drawing, dragging,
placing and editing routes.
These common functions are detailed in the following pages.
Page 350 of 406

11.2.1 Chart Control (zoom and position)
With the cursor placed in the chart area, the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Start Drag Set Centre/

No Function
location Drag zoom
Single click Single click

Selects the feature below the cursor Repositions the chart to the current
position. cursor position.
OR OR
Press and Hold Press and hold
Roll the trackerball and the chart Roll the trackerball and magenta
moves with the cursor square is draw. The chart will zoom
IN to the selected area.
11.2.2 Chart control (zoom, reposition & select cells)
The scale of the chart can be adjusted as follows:
With the cursor placed over the Scale button, the

Left Middle Right
For a full description of the scale button, its features and the ‘traffic light’ indicator, see
section 6.5: Chart Scales and position.
Page 351 of 406

11.2.3 Brilliance control/ chart settings / Standby
These functions are common to the radar and ECDIS modes:
Daylight Chart settings Standby
Allows the selection of Configuration of the chart Exits Chart maintenance and
Daylight, Dusk or Night. display. returns the system to the
The button name changes to standby screen.
reflect the palette selected.
Additional details: Additional details: Capture Screen

See chapter 6.55.5 See chapter 6.8 for details on Also allows a screen capture
For addition instructions and the General/ Advanced and to be taken (see fault finding
warnings. query tabs available in chart section for additional
settings. information)
Page 352 of 406

11.2.4 Positioning, editing and managing waypoints
There are a number of common cursor functions in route planning for positioning, editing of
waypoints and adding Pilotage tools.
Each cursor function is detailed below.
NOTE: These functions are not detailed in the ‘How do I…’ section. It is therefore
recommended that users familiarise themselves with these functions prior to
planning or editing a route.
Editing and manual entry
As waypoints and Pilotage features are added to a route, they are listed in the Edit Route
box shown below.
Latitude and Longitude values can be manually entered or corrected and any items in the
Edit Route list that are shown in Yellow can also be edited.
Values entered in the First Line of a route set a default value for the remainder of the
route. For example, if a channel width is set as 0.100 NM, all subsequent channel widths will
be 0.100 NM. Individual values can then be manually adjusted by clicking in the required
field.
Edit routes tab in route planning
The route editing tabs can be maximized/ minimized by clicking on the up/ down arrow.
When maximized, clicking on the chart area automatically minimizes the tab.
Page 353 of 406

Selecting any waypoint or pilotage feature will place the selected item at the centre of the
chart area. This can be useful when editing a long route at a low scale.
Any Pilotage features that have been added to a route can be edited in the Edit Pilotage
tab. This includes naming of pilotage notes, changing the colours of PI lines etc.
Page 354 of 406

‘Drawing’ a route
Left Middle Right
When a route is being created, the following cursor
Add WP/ Finish
options are available. Start Drag Appending
Undo
Drops a
waypoint at
the current
Finishes the
cursor
route at the Undo the last
position.
last placed action
OR
waypoint
Press & Hold
to drag the
chart
Select and edit a waypoint

Left Middle Right
With the cursor placed over an existing waypoint, Select Drag

Select Action
route details are shown by the cursor and the WP
following cursor options are available. Select a

Opens the
waypoint for No Function
Pilotage menu
editing
Accept
Undo Undo
position
Accepts the
position of a Undo the last Undo the last
selected action action
waypoint
Select and edit a channel width

Left Middle Right
With the cursor placed over the channel width, route Select Drag
Select Action
details are shown by the cursor and the following Edge
cursor options are available. Select a

channel Opens the
No Function
width for Pilotage menu
editing
Accept
Undo Undo
Change
Accepts the
new position
Undo the last Undo the last
of a selected
action action
channel
width
Page 355 of 406

Add a waypoint
Left Middle Right
With the cursor placed on the center line of a route,

Insert WP Select Action
route details are shown by the cursor and the
following cursor options are available where a Inserts a
waypoint can be added. waypoint at
Opens the
the current No Function
Pilotage menu
cursor
position
Accept
Undo Undo
Position
Accepts the
Undo the last Undo the last
position the
action action
new waypoint
Delete a waypoint
Left Middle Right
With the cursor placed over a waypoint, the following
Variable
cursor options are available and a waypoint can be function
Select Action
deleted.
Function is
Opens the
dependent
No Function Pilotage
on cursor
menu
position
The textual descriptions, latitude and longitude for waypoints can be edited in the Edit
Pilotage tab.
If a waypoint is placed directly on-top of another waypoint, all waypoints in-between the two
are deleted; i.e.
Page 356 of 406

Add, edit and delete Head/ Stern Mark at a waypoint
With the cursor placed over a waypoint, the following cursor options are available and
additional Pilotage features can be added and managed.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
The Head and Stern Mark range and bearings can be adjusted and by left clicking on the
Orange square and dragging to the required position.
Note: Stern marks cannot be enabled on the first or last waypoint
Head and Stern Marks can be deleted by right clicking on the Head Mark orange square and
selecting Delete this pilotage tool.
The textual description, latitude and longitude etc can be edited in the Edit Pilotage tab.
Page 357 of 406

Add, edit and delete a Turn PI.
With the cursor placed on a waypoint, the following cursor options are available and
additional Pilotage features can be added and managed.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
Turn PI
Left click on the junction of the arrow and PI

line to select and adjust the range.
Left click on the end of the PI line to select

and adjust the distance of the PI line.
Delete Turn PI: Right click on the arrow for the Turn PI and select Delete this Pilotage
tool.
The textual description, text colour, latitude and longitude etc can be edited in the Edit
Pilotage tab.
Page 358 of 406

Add, edit and delete a clearing range.
With the cursor placed on the route, the following cursor options are available and additional
Pilotage features can be added and managed.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
Clearing Range
Left click on the orange square to select and

reposition the clearing range.
Left click on the edge to select and resize the

clearing range.
Right click on the orange square to delete the

clearing range
Page 359 of 406

Add, edit and delete a clearing bearing.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
Clearing bearing
Left click on the orange square to select and

reposition the clearing bearing.
Left click on the edge to select and adjust the

bearing of the clearing range.
Click on the orange arrow to resize the

clearing bearing.
Right click on the orange square to:

 Select NMT (Not more than)
 Select NLT (Not less than)
 Delete the selected clearing range
Page 360 of 406

Add, edit and delete a Pilotage note.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
Pilotage Note
Left click on the orange square to select

and reposition the Pilotage note.
Right click on the orange square to:

 Select an INFO symbol
 Select a CAUTION symbol
 Delete the selected clearing range
Page 361 of 406

Add, edit and delete a Cross track PI.
Left Middle Right
Variable
Select Action
function
Function is
Opens the
dependent
on cursor
menu
position
Cross track PI
Left click on the orange arrow to select

and reposition the cross track PI.
Left click on the end of the Cross track

PI line to select and adjust the distance
of the line.
Right click on the orange square to

Delete the selected cross track PI.
The textual description, text colour, latitude and longitude etc can be edited in the Edit
Pilotage tab.
Page 362 of 406

Manually select, insert or delete a waypoint or pilotage feature
With the cursor placed over the required waypoint or pilotage feature in the Edit Routes tab,
the following cursor options are available
Left Middle Right
Select Row Insert New Delete
Selects the
waypoint or Inserts a
pilotage waypoint
Deletes the
feature between the
selected
below the current and
waypoint
current next
cursor waypoint
position
11.2.5 Undo/ redo button
The Undo/ Redo button can be used to delete a previous action or ‘redo’ an action. With the
cursor placed over the Undo/ Redo button the following options are available:
Left Middle Right
Undo Redo
Redo
Undo
(undelete)
(delete) the
the last
last action
action
Page 363 of 406

11.2.6 Modify button / Reverse route
Append Waypoint
The modify button automatically picks up the last waypoint in a route making it available for
editing.
Left Middle Right
Append Reverse
Waypoint Route
Selects the
last Reverses
waypoint in the loaded
a route for route.
editing.
Reverse Route
Selecting Reverse route reverses the selected route. Once a route has been reversed it
should be saved under a different name
NOTE: If no route is loaded the Modify button has no action.
Page 364 of 406

11.3 Route Planning; how do I…?
11.3.1 Before you start
The following sections details common tasks within route planning.
The cursor functions used for creating, editing and managing routes are NOT detailed in this
section. Users should familiarise themselves with the cursor functions detailed in the
previous chapter.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The route planning ‘How do I…’ section assumes the following:
Cursor Functions
 Users have familiarised themselves with the cursor functions.
Chart data
 The system has charts loaded and up to date permits are installed.
Safety Checking
 For safety checking, all charts must be updated to the latest update
data available.
The instructions assume that Route Planning has been selected from the Standby screen:
Page 365 of 406

11.3.2 Create and save a new route
1
Place the cursor over the
Route: New Route button
and the following options
are available:
Note: If a route is already open

for editing, a warning is Left Middle Right
presented noting that the
previous route will be closed and Select Route Create New
any changes lost. No Function
to Edit Route
Click on Create New

Route.
2
Create the desired route.
3
To save the route, place
the cursor on the Save
Route button and press
Save Route to File
Left Middle Right
Save Route
to File
Enter a name for the route

in Route/ File name.
Press Save to save the

route.
Press Cancel to exit save

and return to route
planning (the route is NOT
lost).
To Exit route planning

without saving changes,
return to the standby
screen.
Page 366 of 406

11.3.3 Open, edit and save an existing route
Place the cursor over the

Route: New Route button
and the following options
are available:
Note: If a route is already open Left Middle Right

for editing, a warning is
presented noting that the Select
Create New
Route to No Function
previous route will be closed and Edit
Route
any changes lost.
Click on Select Route to

Edit.
Select the route to load

and press Load
2
Edit the route as required.
3
To save the route, place
the cursor on the Save
Route button and press
Save Route to File
Left Middle Right
Save Route
to File
Page 367 of 406

The route name is automatically

shown in Route/ File name.
Press Save to save the route.
A warning is presented noting

that the route already exists.
Press OK to replace the old

version of the route with the
edited version.
Press Cancel to exit save and

return to route planning (the
route is NOT lost).
To Exit route planning without

saving changes, return to the
standby screen.
Page 368 of 406

11.3.4 AutoSave route
If the system is accidently shutdown during route planning or there is a power failure, the
system automatically auto saves any route that is currently being created or edited.
When entering Route Planning after a power failure, the following dialogue will be displayed:
YES: Opens the auto saved version of the route and allows creation/ editing to be
continued.
NO: Opens route planning with no route loaded.
Page 369 of 406

11.3.5 Add, edit critical points on a route
If you have a specific question regarding adding, editing critical points on a route
please contact Kelvin Hughes using the details found in the Contacting Kelvin
Hughes section.
Page 370 of 406

11.3.6 Import a route(s)
When enabled during commissioning of the system, compatible routes will automatically load
from external sources such as GPS, route planning terminals, secondary ECDIS systems
etc.
Compatible routes can also be imported from external media such as USB flash memory.
In Route Planning place the

cursor on the Manage Files
button and the cursor options
shown become available.
Left Middle Right
Select Import Route File Import Delete Route

No Function
Route File File
Select Import from Remote

System to import routes from a
networked ECDIS.
To import from removable media,

ensure Import from Removable
Media is ticked (default)
Page 371 of 406

In Select Route File(s) to

Import, the various drives are
listed. In a normal system these
drives are allocated as follows:

C: Main hard drive
D: CD/ DVD-Rom
If you are not in the correct drive,

click on the ..\ symbol to go up a
level. Locate the drive containing
the route and select the required
route(s).
With the cursor placed over any

of the routes the cursor options
are:
Select/ Deselect: Selects or

deselects the route at the cursor
position. Left Middle Right
Block Select/ Deselect: Selects Select/

No Function
Block Select/
Deselect Deselect
or deselects ALL routes listed.
All routes can also be selected/

deselected using the Select All
or Deselect All buttons
4
Select Import and the selected
route(s) are imported into the
system.
5
Press Close to exit.
Page 372 of 406

11.3.7 Delete a route
1
In Route Planning place the
cursor on the Manage Files
button and the cursor options
shown become available.
Left Middle Right
Select Delete Route File
Import Route Delete Route
No Function
File File
2
In Select Route File(s) to
Delete, the location of stored
routes is automatically opened
If you are not in the correct drive,

click on the ..\ symbol to go up a
level.
Routes are stored in the following

location: C:\ MantaDigital \
Planned Routes
With the cursor placed over any

of the routes the cursor options
are:
Select/ Deselect: Selects or

deselects the route at the cursor
position.
Block Select/ Deselect: Selects

or deselects ALL routes listed.
Left Middle Right
All routes can also be selected/ Select/ Block Select/

No Function
deselected using the Select All Deselect Deselect
or Deselect All buttons.
3
Select Delete, the selected
routes are deleted from the
system.
4
Press Close to exit route deletion
Page 373 of 406

11.3.8 Backup and restore routes
The backup and restoration of routes of all routes is carried out using the Backup & Restore
function which is accessed from the standby screen.
See chapter 8 for full details.
11.3.9 Print a route
Where a printer is connected and commissioned into a system, selected routes can be
printed as follows:
Select/ load the

desired route.
Press the Print

Route button.
Printers must be configured for use with the system during commissioning. Addition of a
printer after a system has been installed will require a service attendance to install and
configure the drivers for the printer.
Caution: Not all printers are compatible with the MantaDigital system.
Please consult with Kelvin Hughes Ltd prior to obtaining a printer.
11.3.10 Change the datum in route planning
The datum for the chart displayed in route planning can be selected. The CCRP, cursor,
chart features and route planning table are converted to the selected datum.
The default datum is WGS84
With the cursor

placed over the
datum button a drop
down list of is
shown
Select the datum

required.
The button name

changes to reflect
the selected datum.
Page 374 of 406

11.3.11 Safety check overview
Safety checking overview:
Using the chart database installed on the system, the safety check function scans the path of
a route for potential hazards which are then identified on screen.
WARNING:
Successful safety checking is fully dependent on the following

factors:
 Installed charts and permits are up to date.
 Ships safety settings (depth, contour, safety contour etc) are

correctly set.
With the cursor placed over the Check button, the following cursor options are available.
Left Middle Right
Safety Clear Configure

Check Results check
Safety Check Clear Results Configure check
A user configurable safety Clears the chart area of Opens the safety check
check safety or Full check results configuration and Full check
screen
Route checking preliminaries
Before running a safety check, the objects to be scanned along the path of the route need to
be configured using the Configure Check button (see next page).
Page 375 of 406

Configure Check
Left Middle Right
Pressing Configure check opens the Configure
Configure
Safety Check Clear Results
Parameter and initiate route checking box. check
Objects in Full Check column

This is an IMO defined list of objects that are
checked during a Full Check. This list cannot be
modified.
Objects in Safety Check column

This is a list of objects that are checked during a
Safety Check. The list can be modified.
Add to Safety Checks

Objects can be added to the safety check list by
selecting individual or groups of items from the list
of Objects in Full Check and pressing the button.
Remove From Safety Check

Objects can be removed from the objects in safety
check list by selecting individual or groups of items
and pressing Remove From Safety Check.
Rest Safety Checks

This resets the Objects in Safety Check to the
IMO recommended level.
Safety and Depth Contours

Sets the safety depth and contour for the vessel.
Note: The values are directly linked to the values

set in chart settings. Changing the safety
settings will also change the values in Chart
Settings.
Safety Height
Sets the safety height for the vessel.
Link Safety Depth and Contour

Links the Safety contour and depth values. The
setting is directly linked to the values set in chart
settings.
Safety Check button

Scans the path of a route using the objects listed in the Objects in Safety Check list.
Full Check button

Scans the path of a route using the objects in the Objects in Full Check list.
Note: Safety checking a long route may take some time.
Page 376 of 406

11.3.12 Safety checking a route
1
For accurate safety checking,
all charts and permits MUST
be up to date and the safety
contour/ depth correctly set.
Load the route to be checked.
Configure the safety check

objects using the Configure
check button.
Left Middle Right
To commence the safety check,
Safety Configure
place the cursor on the Check Check
Clear Results
check
button and press Safety Check
2
The system will scan the route
for hazards using the objects
listed in the Objects in Safety
Check.
Caution: This is NOT a full

safety check
NOTE: Safety checking long

routes may take some time.
3
When the safety check is
complete, hazards are shown on
screen:
In the Edit Routes tab, the

number of hazards identified in
each leg of the route is shown in
the Chk column.
Page 377 of 406

4
Specific hazards are outlined in
red with a brief description of the
hazard.
Place the cursor over the point of

the arrow and additional details
are displayed.
Alternatively Click on the point of

the arrow and the Chart Query
dialogue will open showing more
detailed data.
5
Some chart areas may be
outlined in magenta.
This indicates that there is a

specific hazard associated with
the outlined area, for example a
restricted area.
5
When the hazards have been
identified and the route amended
as necessary, the route should
be saved.
Page 378 of 406

11.3.13 Full safety check a route
1
For accurate safety checking,
all charts and permits MUST
be up to date and the safety
contour/ depth correctly set.
Left Middle Right
Load the route to be checked.
Configure
Safety Check Clear Results
Place the cursor on the Check check
button and press Configure

Check
In Configure Parameters and

initialise route checking, Select
Full Check
2
The system will scan the route
for hazards using the IMO
recommended objects listed in
the Objects in Full Check.
NOTE: Safety checking long

routes may take some time.
3
When the safety check is
complete, hazards are shown on
screen:
In the Edit Routes tab, the

number of hazards identified in
each leg of the route is shown in
the Chk column.
Page 379 of 406

4
Specific hazards are outlined in
red with a brief description of the
hazard.
Place the cursor over the point of

the arrow and additional details
are displayed.
Alternatively Click on the point of

the arrow and the Chart Query
dialogue will open showing more
detailed data.
4
Some areas may be outlined in
magenta. This indicates that
there is a specific hazard
associated with the outlined area,
for example a restricted area.
5
When the hazards have been
identified and the route amended
as necessary, the route should
be saved.
Page 380 of 406

11.3.14 Clear the safety/ full check results from screen
1
Clear results removes all results
of a safety or full check from the
display.
These cannot be recovered so a

safety check would need to be
run again to view the results.
Place the cursor on the Check

button.
Left Middle Right
Middle click on Clear Results Clear Configure

Safety Check
Results check
2
Clearing the results does not
affect the route. It removes the
safety or full check results from
the chart and the Chk column in
the Edit Route tab.
Page 381 of 406

Chapter 12: Simulation mode
12 Simulation mode
Simulation Mode runs a pre-recorded playback of data that can be used for
familiarisation and training purposes.
Where enabled (simulator is not enabled on all systems), the simulator is accessed by
selecting the Simulation Mode icon in the Simulation… area of the standby screen:
If the Simulator is ‘greyed-out’ or cannot be accessed there

may be a problem with the eToken or Simulation mode has
not been enabled in optional features.

additional details.
12.1 Run Simulator Mode
When simulator is selected a

replay of a vessel leaving the
Thames estuary is shown.
The replay lasts approximately

5 minutes.
A red ‘S’ is shown at the

bottom of the screen indicating
the system is running in
Simulator mode.
Page 382 of 406

Chapter 12: Simulation mode
12.2 Simulation: Changing display modes
If the display mode is changed whilst Simulator mode is running, the selected mode will
continue to run the simulation.
Caution: Normal navigation is NOT shown.
A red ‘S’ continues to be shown at the bottom of the screen indicating the Simulator is
running.
Radar in Simulation mode Change display mode ECDIS running in simulator mode
Operating in Simulator mode
The following functions do not operate during simulation replay.
 Tune bar
 Pulse length control
 Performance monitor
 Mute
 Sea & Rain filters
12.3 Stop the simulator
To stop simulation mode, return to the StandBy screen.
Page 383 of 406

Chapter 13: Set-up mode
13 Set-up mode
Set-up mode can only be accessed by commissioning or service engineers to
configure the system.
Access to Set-up mode is password protected and can only be accessed by authorised
Kelvin Hughes engineers or agents.
Access to the Set-up page is monitored and logged by the system.
WARNING
Unauthorised access to the Set-up menu invalidates the warranty status
or the unit and can inhibit the functionality of the system.
WARNING
There are no operational or software requirements that necessitate
access to the operating system desktop.
Unauthorised access to the operating system desktop invalidates the

warranty status of the unit.
Attempted access to the desktop is logged by the system,
Page 384 of 406

Chapter 14: Fault Finding
14 Fault Finding
14.1 Grab-IT fault diagnostic software
The Kelvin Hughes ‘Grab-IT’ Software is a diagnostic tool for MantaDigital Widescreen
Radar & ECDIS systems. The software is supplied by the technical advice department of
Kelvin Hughes and is not part of a standard system.
When the software is run it analyses the system and produces a report which can be
emailed to our technical advice department for investigation.
Kelvin Hughes technical advice

will email a compressed file
(WinZip) called grabit.zip
Noting all antivirus precautions, Unzip file

unzip the file and copy the
contents (MD4_0_3.grabIT) to a
virus free USB memory device.
Rename the file MD4_0_3.exe
Note: the file must be ‘unzipped’

and renamed prior to use. Rename file Virus free memory stick
Insert the memory stick

containing MDD4_0_3.exe into
the MantaDigital processor
Page 385 of 406

On the standby screen, click on

the software version.
In the Software box, click on the

Upgrade software button
In the software upgrade dialogue

click YES; this will NOT upgrade
the software but will run the
program on the USB memory
stick
3
The MantaDigital program will
close and the Grab-IT program
will start.
4 The system will now prompt with the following critical safety warning.
THE FOLLOWING WARNING MUST BE READ AND UNDERSTOOD.
Page 386 of 406

5
The Grab-IT program will now start.
Whilst the program is running various screens will open.
DO NOT TOUCH OR USE THE SYSTEM WHILST GRABIT IS RUNNING.
When the diagnostics has been completed the system automatically restarts. After the
restart, the system can be used for its normal navigation purpose..
When Grab-IT has completed running, the memory stick will contain three files ending in
.kham as follows:
FULLkhexportV2XXX.kham
This includes all data including screenshots. These screenshots are removed from the
system when Grab-IT has been run.
File size: This varies depending on the number of screenshots but can be many Megabytes.
STANDARDkhexportV2XXX.kham
This includes all data but does not save screenshots.
File size: Less than 2.5mb
LITEkhexportV2XXX.kham
This includes the basic diagnostics and no screenshots.
File size: Less than 200kb
Depending on the bandwidth of the available email system, please return the largest
file possible to Kelvin Hughes technical advice @:
Technical.advice@kelvinhughes.com
It is recommended that the three .KHAM files are not deleted until the issue under
investigation has been resolved.
5
Notes & Cautions:
• The .kham file is encrypted and cannot be opened or analysed by the user or Kelvin
Hughes agents.
• DO NOT attempt to compress the file before sending it by email. Compressing a
.kham file actually increases the size of the file.
Note: This section is currently under construction with additional fault finding information
being added.
If you have a specific question regarding fault finding please contact Kelvin Hughes
technical advice using the details found in the Contacting Kelvin Hughes section.
Page 387 of 406

Chapter 15: Crew based maintenance
15 Crew based maintenance
If you have a specific question regarding maintenance of the system, please

contact Kelvin Hughes using the details found in the Contacting Kelvin Hughes
section.
Page 388 of 406

Chapter 16: Type approval certificates
16 Type approval certificates

Type approval certificates can be obtained from the Kelvin Hughes web site as follows:
www.kelvinhughes.com
From the Kelvin Hughes web home page, select ‘About’ then ‘Approval Certificates’
Certificates can be selected and downloaded by using the ‘Select Product family /
issuer’ drop down list or by searching for a specific part number using the ‘Part number /
reference’ box.
Page 389 of 406

Chapter 17: NMEA messages
17 NMEA messages
The following list details the NMEA messages that can be accepted by the MantaDigital
processor.
This list is current for V1.9.1 ZM2144 software and is subject to change with later versions of
software.
AIS AIS ALR AIS signal
ACK Alarm acknowledge output
ALR Alarms
Azipod ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
XDR Azipod data
ECDIS ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
GLL Position
OSD Own ships data
RMC Position
RSD Radar system data
RTE Route Data
RTE Route data output
TLB Target label output
TTD Target output
TTM Tracked target output
VHW Water speed and heading
VTG Vector track and speed over ground
ZDA Date and time
Echo sounder ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
DBT Depth
DPT Depth
GPS ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
DTM Position
GGA Position
GLL Position
GNS Position
RMC Position
RTE Route data
VTG Vector track and speed over ground
ZDA Time and date
Page 390 of 406

Chapter 17: NMEA messages
Display Control BBLS Display brightness (Not user configurable)

PIP Picture in picture
Serial Engine ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
RPM Engine revs and pitch
Serial Gyro ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
HDT Heading
ROT Rate of turn
THS Heading
Serial Log ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
VBW Dual ground water speed
VHW Water speed and heading
Serial ROT ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
ROT Rate of turn
Serial Rudder ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
RSA Rudder sensor angle
Thrusters ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
PPRS Thrusters
Wind sensor ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
MWV Wind data
Serial output messages ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
OSD Own ships data
RSD Radar system data
TLB Target label output
TTD Target output
TTM Tracked target output
Transducer 1 ACK Alarm acknowledge output

ALR Alarms
XDR Transducer 1
Page 391 of 406

Chapter 18: Abbreviations
18 Abbreviations
ACK Acknowledge ANT Antenna
ACQ Acquire/ acquisition AP Autopilot
AFC Automatic frequency control ARCS Admiralty raster chart service
AGC Automatic gain control AUD Audio/ audible
AIS Automatic Identification system AVAIL Available
1
ALT Altitude/ alternate AZ Acquisition zone or Azimuth
1
ANCH Anchor
2
ANCH Anchor watch
BCR Bow crossing range BRG Bearing

BCT Bow crossing time BRILL Brilliance
BKGRD Background BWW Bearing waypoint to waypoint
CAL Calibrate/ calibration CONT Contrast

1
CCRP Consistent common reference point CORR Correction
2
CCRS Consistent common reference system CORR Correlator
CENT Centre CPA Closest point of approach
CHG Change CRS Course
CLR Clear CTW Course through water
CNCL Cancel C-Up Course up
COG Course over ground CSR Cursor
DAY/NT Day/ night DIST Distance

DECR Decrease DG Dangerous goods
DEL Delete DGPS Differential global positioning system
DEP Departure DPTH Depth
DEST Destination DR Dead reckoning
DEV Deviation DTG Distance to go
DISP Display
EBL Electronic bearing line EPFS External position fixing system

EBRL Electronic bearing and range line EPIRB Emergency position indicating radio beacon
ECDIS Electronic chart display & information system ERBL Electronic range and bearing line
ECS Electronic chart system ERR Error
ENC Electronic navigation chart ETA Estimated time of arrival
1
ENH Enhance ETD Estimated time of departure
2
ENT Enter ETD Enhanced target detection
EP Estimated position EXT External
EPA Electronic plotting aid EZ Exclusion zone
FWD Forward
GC Great Circle GNSS Global navigation satellite system

GND Ground GZ Guard zone
HAP Harbour approach and pilotage HL Heading line

HDG Heading H-UP Head up
IBS Integrated bridge system INT Interval

IND Indication IR Interference rejection
INS Integrated navigation system
KN Knots
Page 392 of 406

Chapter 18: Abbreviations
Lat Latitude LOP Line of position

LIM Limit LP Long pulse
LON Longitude LR Long range
MAN Manual MMSI Maritime Mobile service identity

MOB Man over board NAV Navigation
MON Monitor/ Performance monitor NMT Not more than
MP Medium pulse NORM Normal
MVR Manoeuver N-UP North up
OOW Officer on watch OS Ownship
PI Parallel index lines) PPI Planned position indicator

PL Pulse length PPR Pulses per revolution
PM Performance monitor PRF Pulse repetition frequency
POSN Position PWR Power
RAD Radius RM(R) Relative motion with relative trails

RADAR Radio detection and ranging receiver RM(T) Relative motion with true trails
RCDS Raster chart display system RNC Raster navigation chart
R CRS Elative course RNG Range
REF Reference ROT Rate of turn
REL Relative RR Range rings
RIP Radar interlay processor R SPD Relative speed
RL Rhumb line RTD Real time display
RM Relative motion Rx Receiver/ Receive
SART Search and rescue transponder SPD Speed

SAT Satellite STAB Stability
SC/SC Scan to Scan correlation STBY Standby
SEL Select STG Speed to go
SOG Speed over ground STW Speed through water
SOLAS Safety of life at sea SYM Symbol
SP Short pulse SYNC Synchronised
T True TOD Time of departure

TCPA Time to closest point of approach TPL Transferred line of position
T CTW True course through water TRK Track
T SPW True speed through water TT Target tracking
TGT Target TTG Time to go
TM True motion Tx Transmit
TM(T) True motion with true trails TWOL Time to wheel over line
TOA Time of arrival
UNSTAB Unstabilised
VAR Variation/ variable VOY Voyage

VECT Vector VRM Variable rang marker
VID Video
WGS World geodetic system WOT Wheel over time

WOL Wheel over line WP Waypoint
WOP Wheel over point WPT Waypoint
XTD Cross track distance XTE Cross track error
Page 393 of 406

Chapter 19: Contacting Kelvin Hughes
19 Contacting Kelvin Hughes

Equipment service
Providing Value, Quality and Safety through a world-wide team
Installation and After Sales Service
We recognise that delivering a first-time- What we offer

fix and value for money are fundamental • Spare Parts Sales
expectations of our customers. • Global Service
Key to meeting these expectations is a • Warranty Support
• Installation and Commissioning
philosophy of working in partnership with
Services
our customers and suppliers centred
• Management / Maintenance Contracts
around a global team of experienced
• VDR Annual Performance Testing
service engineers and support staff who
• VDR Replay Services
are all passionate about delivering service • Compass Adjusting and Repair
excellence to the marine industry. • Operator Equipment familiarisation
and Training
In applying this approach a shared set of • Equipment Surveys and Inspection
values has emerged that defines the way • Technical Advice
that we aim to work with our customers, • Major retrofit project management
our service suppliers and within our own • V-Sat Airtime Contracts
organisation; these being to:
 Ensure that the customer is central to everything that we do.

 Apply mutual trust, fairness and honesty in all of our business dealings.
 Strive to exceed customer expectations, on time and right first time.
 Provide value for money, good quality and maintain vessel safety.
 Continue to improve the service offerings through process improvements and
innovation.
 Adapt quickly to changing customer needs.
These values and capabilities drive the entire customer experience and are at the heart of
what we do 24 hours every day, 365 days a year
Page 394 of 406

19.1 Request a service ‘on-line’
A service request can be made on-line via the Kelvin Hughes web site as follows:
From the Kelvin Hughes web page www.kelvinhughes.com, select Commercial vessels /
Equipment Service/ Request service and complete the on-line form.
If you do not have access to the internet please contact any of the Kelvin Hughes offices
shown in the following pages who will assist in your service request.
http://www.kelvinhughes.com/
Page 395 of 406

19.2 Service agents list
A full list of authorised Kelvin Hughes service agents can be found on the Kelvin Hughes
web site as follows
From the Kelvin Hughes web page www.kelvinhughes.com, select Commercial vessels /
Equipment Service / Service agents and select the region where service assistance is
required.
If you do not have access to the internet please contact any of the Kelvin Hughes offices
shown in the following pages who will assist in locating a suitable agent.
http://www.kelvinhughes.com/
Page 396 of 406

19.3 Contact Kelvin Hughes
Kelvin Hughes
UK head offices
(GMT+0)
Contact details
email: service@kelvinhughes.co.uk
Service +44 208 498 1761
Phone:
(Monday to Friday 8:00 to 17:00 GMT)
Out of hours phone: +44 208 498 1761
Fax: +44 208 559 8526
Technical email: technical.advice@kelvinhughes.co.uk

advice
Phone: +44 208 502 6887
Fax: +44 208 559 8526
Spares email: spares@kelvinhughes.co.uk
Phone: +44 208 502 6887
Fax: +44 208 559 8526
General enquiries +44 208 502 6887

General
Fax: +44 208 559 8526
Kelvin Hughes Customer Services Group,

Address New North Road, Hainault, ESSEX, IG6 2UR,
UK
Internet
Website: www.kelvinhughes.com
Page 397 of 406

19.4 Kelvin Hughes regional offices
The following details the regional offices of Kelvin Hughes.
Kelvin Hughes Kelvin Hughes A/S Kelvin Hughes A/S

Rotterdam, Netherlands BV Bergen, Norway Arhus, Denmark
(GMT+1) (GMT+1) (GMT+1)
service@kelvinhughes.nl service@kelvinhughes.dk service@kelvinhughes.dk
Phone: +31 10 472 4050 Phone: +45 8611 2888 Phone: +45 8611 2888
Fax: +31 10 472 4051 Fax: +45 8611 2260 Fax: +45 8611 2260
Kelvin Hughes PTE Ltd Kelvin Hughes Kelvin Hughes Limited

Singapore Shanghai, China New Orleans, USA
(GMT+8) (GMT+8) (GMT-5)
service@khsing.com service@kelvinhughes.cn usservice@kelvinhughes.com
Phone: +65 6545 9880 Phone: +86 21 58 772 105 Phone: +1 504 731 2999
Fax: +65 6545 8892 Fax: +86 21 58 785 944 Fax: +1 866 648 9763
Page 398 of 406

19.5 Centers of excellence
Centers of excellence are authorised Kelvin Hughes service agents that have met and
continue to meet the following criteria:
 The agent should demonstrate a quality system and show associated industry
accreditation
 They hold spare parts to a level agreed with Kelvin Hughes Ltd
 The agent’s engineers are trained by Kelvin Hughes in the installation, service and
repair of Kelvin Hughes equipment and attend regular training updates
 The agent meets a measured first time fix as determined by Kelvin Hughes
Details for each centre of excellence are located in the service agents list in the Kelvin
Hughes web site.
Turn-On Electronics Kaigai Gijyutsu KK Kaigai Gijyutsu KK
Busan, Korea Japan (Kobe) Japan (Yokohama)
(GMT+9) (GMT+9) (GMT+9)
service@turnon.co.kr kgkkobe@po1.dti2.ne.jp cs@kgkjp.com
Aage Hempel Zener Marine AMI sales

Spain Dubai Australia
(GMT+1) (GMT+4) (GMT+8)
service@aagehempel.com service@zener.ae service@amisales.com.au
Page 399 of 406

19.6 Useful Kelvin Hughes contacts
Various departments and regional offices can be contacted on-line using the Contact tab
which can be found on the Kelvin Hughes website.
Other contacts that may be of use are:
APT
To arrange the Annual performance testing of APT@kelvinhughes.co.uk
VDR/ S-VDR systems.
Optional features
To arrange for an optional feature of a system to Technical.advice@kelvinhughes.co.uk
be enabled or renewed
Marketing
For information on Kelvin Hughes or our product marketing@kelvinhughes.com
range
19.7 Charts, chart licenses and permits

A full range of paper and electronic charts are available from Kelvin Hughes. For more
information please visit the charts section of the Kelvin Hughes web site or alternatively
contact any of the following:
Tel: +44 (0) 20 8502 6887

United Kingdom
Fax: +44 (0) 20 8500 0837
London
Out of hours Mobile +44 (0) 7748 146504
United Kingdom Tel +44 (0) 23 8063 4911

Southampton Fax +44 (0) 23 8033 0014
United Kingdom Tel +44 (0) 14 1429 6462

Glasgow Fax +44 (0) 14 1429 5539
Netherlands Tel +31 (0) 10 416 7622

Rotterdam Fax +31 (0) 10416 7218
Monday to Friday: 0830 to
Tel: +65 6545 9880
1700
Singapore Tel: +44 (0) 208 502 6887 and
1700 to 0830 call our UK office
select option 5
Friday 1730 onwards and over
Tel: +65 9817 4202
weekend
ChartCo Tel: +44 (0)20 8276 0003
Fax +44 (0)20 8276 0004
Page 400 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
20 Index
Backup file format ............................................... 295

1 Base display ............................See Set Chart button
12 hour voyage replay............ See Ownship settings Bow thrusters ...................................... See HAP tab
Brilliance ..................................... See Video settings
BSB charts ......................................................... 199
A
Abbreviations ..................................................... 392 C
Acquire ....................................... See target tracking
Adjusting parameters on-screen .......................... 23 Camera
AIS Bearing true & relative..................................... 48
Auto activation of sleeping targets ................... 38 Manual operation ............................................. 48
Deselecting targets .......................................... 40 Overview .......................................................... 47
Filters ............................................................... 38 Setup................................................................ 49
Lost target or signal ......................................... 41 Tracking modes ............................................... 51
ON/ OFF button blacked out ............................ 35 Capture screen ............................ See Display mode
Safety Related Messages ................................ 39 CCTV input ........................................................... 57
Selecting level of data on screen ..................... 37 Centre reset......................................... See Ownship
Selecting targets .............................................. 40 Change display mode ........................................... 32
Settings menu .................................................. 37 Change Waypoint Details button . See Route Editing
Show Ownship data ......................................... 37 Chart
Sleeping a target.............................................. 41 Chart 1 symbols ............................................... 70
Switching ON & OFF ....................................... 35 Chart query button ........................................... 62
Target data ................................ See Target Data Examples of symbol styles .............................. 70
Alarms Scale indicator ..................................... See Scale
Acknowledging................................................. 42 Set Co-ordinates ............................................ 232
Audio levels ..................................................... 45 Set position of... ............................................... 61
Audio ON/ OFF .............................................. 283 Symbol Styles .................................................. 70
Colours ............................................................ 45 Traffic light Indicator ......................................... 60
Configuration ................................................. 282 Chart maintenance
Enable & Disable ........................................... 283 Common functions ......................................... 310
Expand alarm list ............................................. 43 Filters ............................................................. 316
Grouped alarms ............................................... 43 Installed data.................................................. 310
Limits ............................................................. 283 Overview ........................................................ 299
List of alarms ................................................. 286 Routes on chart.............................................. 319
Password ................................................. 46, 285 Uninstall database.......................................... 311
Priorities ........................................................... 44 Chart settings
Alternative route .................See Route Management 2-depth shades ................................................ 67
Analogue Gyro adjustment................................. 103 4-depth shades ................................................ 67
Anchor watch ..................... See Target Referencing Advanced tab ................................................... 76
APT .................................................................... 400 Chart features .................................................. 77
ARCS charts ...................................................... 199 Colour palette................................................... 73
ARPA ......................................... See target tracking Contour safety warning .................................... 69
Auto Load NMEA Routes tick box ........... See Route Custom selection.............................................. 77
Settings Custom selection Save & Delete ...................... 78
Automatic Sea/ Rain ............................... See Radar Data Source ..................................................... 74
Azipod RPM and direction ....................See HAP tab Depth and safety contours ............................... 68
Depth shades ................................................... 67
Display levels ................................................... 66
B
General Tab ..................................................... 65
Backup & Restore Soundings display ............................................ 79
Backup Data .................................................. 292 Time vaying objects ......................................... 81
Export debug data ......................................... 295 Units of measure .............................................. 74
Restoring data ............................................... 294 Check Route Edits button ............ See Route Editing
System backup .............................................. 293 Clear Check Results button ......... See Route Editing
Page 401 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
Clear past tracks .................... See Ownship settings Dusk

C-Map permits..... See Chart Maintenance; How do I (Video levels) .........................See Video Settings
COG ..................................................................... 82 Dynamic Clutter Suppression .................. See Radar
Colour palette .............................. See Chart settings
Configure Check button ............ See Route planning E
Contact us .......................................................... 394
Copyright................................................................ 6 EBL............................................. See VRM and EBL
Course-UP ......................................................... 127 ECDIS
CPA Limit adjustment........................................... 83 Running ECDIS mode ...................................... 31
Cursor Edit Selected Route button .......... See Route Editing
Configuration ................................................... 84 Eject removable media ....................................... 297
pop-up delay .................................................... 84 Electronic bearing line
Tooltip .............................................................. 84 Adjustment ..................................................... 275
Units of measure.............................................. 85 ON/ OFF ........................................................ 274
Curved Heading Line ..... 133, See Ownship settings True/ Rel ........................................................ 275
Custom selection......................... See Chart settings Electronic range and bearing line ....................... 275
Enhance .................................................. See Radar
D Enhanced Correlator ............................... See Radar
ERBL ..............................................See VRM & EBL
Data source ................................. See Chart settings ETA uses Current SOG ......... See Route Monitoring
Datum .................................................. See Position ETA uses Planned Speed ..... See Route Monitoring
Day black background.......................................... 75 ETA uses Set Speed ............. See Route Monitoring
Day Bright ............................................................ 75 eToken ................................................................. 97
Daylight Not detected ..................................................... 97
(Video levels) ......................... See Video Settings Export Debug Data ............................................. 296
DCS
Dynamic clutter suppression ............... See Radar F
Dead reckoning .................................... See Position
Delete Fault Finding....................................................... 385
A waypoint in route ........................................ 205 Fix position ..................................See Position fixing
All edits ....... See Route Management, See Route Fix/ Unfix Target button ...... See Target Referencing
Management FLIR...................................................... See Camera
ALL Tgts button ............................................. 250 Four Depth Shades .....................See Chart settings
Edited Version of route button ............ See Route
Management, See Route Management G
Maps .................................................... See Maps
oldest edit button .. See Route Management, See Gain
Route Management Radar gain .......................................... See Radar
Depth Got to Run … ....................................................... 17
Below vessel - viewing ..................................... 86 Grab it software .................................................. 385
Contour ................................... See Chart settings Ground stabilisation ....................... See Stabilisation
Shades button......................... See Chart settings Guardzone
Soundings ............................... See Chart settings Creation ........................................................... 99
Viewing in HAP tab ........................................ 101 Deletion .......................................................... 100
De-Select Alt Route button.See Route Management ECDIS mode .................................... 98, 251, 256
De-Select Route button ......See Route Management Enable, disable and remove........................... 100
Display control panel ............................................ 20 Exclusion sector ............................................... 98
Display Level button .................... See Chart settings Inclusion sector ................................................ 98
Display mode Gyro..........................................See Heading sensor
Capture screen ................................................ 87
Changing modes.............................................. 87 H
Exiting .............................................................. 88
Loss of data when changing modes ................ 88 Handbook
Mode greyed out .............................................. 88 How to use it ...................................................... 8
Overview .......................................................... 10 HAP tab in dual display ...................................... 101
Distance To Run button .............See Route Settings Harbour Approach & Pilotage (HAP) .................... 31
Drag-Zoom ............................................... See Zoom Heading sensor
Dual radar display ................................................ 28 Indication and display..................................... 104
Page 402 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
Manual adjustment ........................................ 103 Selection ........................................................ 112

ROT ............................................................... 103 Manual Log................................. See Speed Sensor
Selection ........................................................ 102 Map
Head-UP ............................................................ 127 Set colour ....................................................... 118
Health and safety ................................................... 7 Maps
How do I... Change map origin ......................................... 120
Automatically load a permit ............................ 324 Clearing from screen ...................................... 120
Install a chart CD ........................................... 332 Close menu .................................................... 121
Manually load C-Map permits ........................ 325 Create ............................................................ 116
Manually load permits form file ...................... 327 Dangerous item(s).......................................... 118
Prepare permit for installation ........................ 323 Deleting .......................................................... 115
View & delete ENC permits ........................... 328 Editing ............................................................ 116
View and install IHO certificates .................... 329 Line style ........................................................ 118
Loading .......................................................... 115
I Menus ............................................................ 114
Merge ............................................................. 119
IHO certificate ..... See Chart Maintenance; How do I New ................................................................ 116
Install charts ........ See Chart maintenance; How do I ON / OFF ....................................................... 119
Relative .......................................................... 114
J Save ............................................................... 119
Select True or Rel mapping ........................... 114
JCU ...................................................... See Camera True................................................................ 114
Jump to position ............................. See Set Position Undo entry ..................................................... 118
Mariner events
K Addition .......................................................... 125
Delete............................................................. 126
Kelvin Hughes regional offices ........................... 398 Editing ............................................................ 125
Passowrd to delete all .................................... 126
L Mariner notes
Addition .......................................................... 122
License (Chart).... See Chart maintenance; How do I Deletion .......................................................... 124
Licenses (chart)................... See Chart Maintenance Editing ............................................................ 124
Lines of position ................................................. 105 Password to delete all .................................... 124
Add ................................................................ 106 Viewing .......................................................... 123
Cannot be added or viewed ........................... 105 Master a tranceiver .................................. See Radar
Deletion ......................................................... 107 Maximise
Display scales ................................................ 105 Show chart menus ....................... See Show hide
Fix tab ..................................... See Position fixing Merge maps ............................................. See Maps
Radar modes ................................................. 105 Microsoft Windows© copyright ............................... 6
Restore .......................................................... 109 Minimised
Selection ........................................................ 107 Hide chart menus ........................ See Show Hide
Transfer ......................................................... 108 MOB ......................................... See Man Overboard
Link safety depth and contour ..... See Chart settings Mute ........................................................ See Radar
Load
Maps .................................................... See Maps
Routes ...........................See Route Management
N
Log .............................................. See Speed sensor Night
Look-Ahead tab ...................... See Ownship settings (Video Levels) ........................See Video Settings
LOP ......................................... See Lines of position Night vision camera .............................. See Camera
NMEA messages that can be accepted.............. 390
M No ENC available alarm ....................................... 97
North-UP ............................................................ 127
Man Overboard
Activation ....................................................... 111
Delete ............................................................ 113
O
De-select ....................................................... 113 Offset centre ........................................ See Ownship
Dual display ................................................... 111 Optional features
Past tracks ..................................................... 112 How do I ......................................................... 345
Page 403 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
Overview ........................................................ 343 Show or hide a fix........................................... 158

Trial period ..................................................... 343 Update DR using a fix .................................... 157
Orientation Predictor ................................................. See Vector
North, Course & Head-up .............................. 127 Predictor length ...................................... See Vector
Ownship Profiles ............................................................... 165
Offset centre .................................................. 129 Importing from memory stick .......................... 167
Set max lookahead ........................................ 129 Last settings ................................................... 167
Ownship settings ................................................ 131 load and save................................................. 166
Clear past track password ............................. 140 Removing ....................................................... 166
Configure check button .................................. 147 Saving to USB memory stick .......................... 167
Curved heading line ....................................... 133 Setting as a start-up profile ............................ 166
Look-ahead adjustment ................................. 146 USB virus precaution ..................................... 167
Look-ahead password ................................... 145 What is saved? .............................................. 165
Look-ahead tab .............................................. 144 Propeller RPM and Pitch ..................... See HAP tab
Ownship outline ............................................. 132 Pulse length (radar) ................................. See Radar
Ownship tab ................................................... 131
Past track tab ................................................. 138 R
Radar mode ................................................... 131
Replay archive data ....................................... 141 Radar
Replay voyage data ....................................... 142 Automatic tune ............................................... 196
Stern Line ...................................................... 132 Dynamic Clutter Suppression......................... 169
Tick intervals .................................................. 139 Enhance ......................................................... 171
Track length ................................................... 138 Gain control .................................................... 172
True motion settings ...................................... 136 Interference rejection ..................................... 175
Vector management ...................................... 131 Interswitch bypass mode................................ 179
Voyage replay controls .................................. 143 Interswitch unit ............................................... 178
Mute ............................................................... 183
P No Correlation ................................................ 176
Performance monitor...................................... 185
Parallel index lines ............................................. 149 Pulse length ................................................... 189
Adding ........................................................... 149 Radar interlay (ECDIS) .................................. 190
Adjusting ........................................................ 150 Radiation hazards .............................................. 5
Removing ...................................................... 149 Rain filter ........................................................ 174
Passwords ......................................................... 151 SART ............................................................. 195
Past position indicator Scan to Scan.................................................. 176
Switching ON & OFF ..................................... 152 Sea anti-clutter ............................................... 173
True & relative ............................................... 153 Trails .............................................................. 197
True & relative cannot be selected ................ 153 Tune indictaor ................................................ 196
Past Track Tab ....................... See Ownship settings Rain filters ............................................... See Radar
Path Predictor .........................................See Vector Raster Charts ..................................................... 199
Performance Monitor Rate of Turn ....................................................... 103
PM ...................................................... See Radar Reference (fix) a target ....... See Target Referencing
Permits .............. See Chart Maintenance, See Chart Relative
Maintenance; How do I Electronic bearing line .................................... 275
PI lines ................................ See Parallel index lines Mapping ............................................... See Maps
Picture in Picture ..................................... See CCTV Motion ............................................................ 127
PIP .......................................................... See CCTV Removable media .................................................. 6
Position Replay data ........................... See Ownship settings
Accepting a fix ............................................... 157 Restore data ......................... See Backup & Restore
Add a fix ......................................................... 155 ROT ................................................ See Rate of turn
Datum ............................................................ 163 Route Editing
DGPS indicator .............................................. 160 Accept or discard changes ............................. 206
Entering Co-ordinates .................................... 232 Channel widths .............................................. 204
Fix .................................................................. 154 Check Route Edits button not found............... 201
Offset ............................................................. 161 Checking a route ............................................ 207
Offset cardinal directions ............................... 162 Edit Selected Route button not found............. 200
Reviewing a fix............................................... 159 Editing the selected route............................... 201
Sensor SELECTION and control ................... 160 Opening route editing ..................................... 200
Page 404 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
Waypoint addition .......................................... 203 Pos Sensor ...................................... See Position

Waypoint editing ............................................ 202 Routes........................... See Route Management
Waypoint, change details of.. ......................... 205 Target........ See Target tracking - selecting target
Route Management Service
Alternative route selection ..................... 220, 221 Centres of excellence..................................... 399
Alternative route, de-selection ....................... 222 Request a service .......................................... 395
Alternative route, switching to... ..................... 221 Service agents list .......................................... 396
Delete an edited version of a route ........ 210, 215 Set
De-select a main route................................... 219 Anchor watch button ...... See Target Referencing
Loading an editied route ................................ 214 Max lookahead ................................ See Ownship
Route colours................................................. 220 Ownship position ............................. See Ownship
Select & load a main route............................. 212 Set Chart button ............................................. 231
Route monitoring Set Chart button changed colour ................... 231
From route editing mode................................ 224 Set Position button ......................................... 232
In ECDIS or Radar modes ............................. 223 Time of arrival ................... See Route Monitoring
Open Route monitoring dialog ....................... 224 Set-up Mode ....................................................... 384
Speed and ETA calculations .......................... 226 Shallow contour ...........................See Chart settings
Route planning Shallow only ................................See Chart settings
Common functions ......................................... 350 Show Hide
How do I ........................................................ 365 Hiding chart menus ........................................ 230
Overview ........................................................ 350 Single radar display .............................................. 28
Reverse route ................................................ 364 Slave a transceiver .................................. See Radar
Waypoint creation .......................................... 353 Software
Route Settings 3rd party software .............................................. 6
Alarm tab ....................................................... 218 Version number ................................................ 18
Auto load NMEA routes ................................. 217 SOG ..................................................................... 82
Display of route features ................................ 216 Soundings ...................................See Chart settings
Display tab ..................................................... 216 Speed sensor
Distance to run............................................... 216 Button changing colour .................................. 234
General tab .................................................... 217 Dual axis log display ...................................... 235
Open route settings ....................................... 216 Indication & display ........................................ 234
Rudder angle...................................................... 228 Manual speed adjustment .............................. 234
Selection and control...................................... 233
S Source............................................................ 233
W, B, M or P symbol ...................................... 233
Safety contour ............................. See Chart settings Speed uses Set Arrival Time . See Route Monitoring
Safety notices and warnings .................................. 4 Spyscope............................................................ 236
Safety Related Messages .................................... 39 Zoom .............................................................. 237
Same as Radar .......................... See Video Settings Zoom not available in ECDIS ......................... 237
SART ...................................................... See Radar SRM
Save AIS safety related messages ........................... 39
Maps .................................................... See Maps Stabilisation
Scale Button changes colour ................................... 239
Best Scale ....................................................... 58 Sea or Ground ............................................... 238
Best Scale in fixed mode ................................. 58 Standard display ......................See Set Chart button
Chart modes explained .................................... 58 Standby screen
Set Best Scale ................................................. 59 Overview .......................................................... 17
Set or select a scale ........................................ 59 Returning to .. .................................................. 32
Traffic light indicator......................................... 60 Start Drag Waypoint button ......... See Route Editing
Zoom IN & OUT ............................................... 59 Stern Line ON/ OFF............... See Ownship settings
Scan/Scan............................................... See Radar Suppress all overlays (ECDIS) See Set Chart button
Screen brilliance..........................See Video settings Switch Routes ................... See Route Management
Sea Switching OFF ...................................................... 27
Anti-clutter........................................... See Radar Switching ON........................................................ 16
Stabilisation ............................... See Stabilisation Symbol styles ..............................See Chart settings
Select System Alarm button ............................................ 20
Alt Route button .............See Route Management
COG & SOG .................................................... 82
Page 405 of 406

Chapter 20: Index
T Type approval certificate .................................... 389
Target association U
Display AIS or radar as default ...................... 244
OFF (disable) ................................................. 245 Units of measure .........................See Chart settings
ON (enabling) ................................................ 242 Updates (Chart) .. See Chart maintenance; How do I
Settings .......................................................... 242 User maps ................................................ See Maps
Show AIS or radar data ................................. 245 UTC time
What is it? ...................................................... 241 Set local time offset ........................................ 265
Target Data Setting UTC time ............................................ 264
Delete all targets ............................................ 250 Time marked with * .................................. 36, 264
Display definitions .......................................... 247
Information on targets .................................... 246 V
Target priorities in tote display ....................... 249
Target tote ..................................................... 248 Variable Range Markers
Tote display definitions .................................. 248 Adjustment ..................................................... 274
Target Referencing ON/ OFF ........................................................ 273
Anchor watch - reset ...................................... 255 Vector
Anchor watch - set ......................................... 254 Length adjustment.......................................... 277
Anchor watch limits ........................................ 254 Path predictor................................................. 278
Cannot reference with AIS ON....................... 252 Predictor length .............................................. 278
COG & SOG calculation ................................ 253 Time marks .................................................... 277
Deselect (unfix) a target................................. 253 True or Relative ............................................. 276
Fix a target ..................................................... 251 Vessel outline................................................. 278
Ref target set as anchor watch ...................... 255 Vector chart types............................................... 279
Target tracking Vessel Outlines ...................................... See Vector
Acquiring a target........................................... 257 Vessel predictor...................................... See Vector
Deleting a tracked target................................ 259 Video settings
De-selecting a target...................................... 259 Backlight brilliance ......................................... 272
General notes on target tracking.................... 256 Video Settings .................................................... 266
Lost target(s).................................................. 260 Adjustment ..................................................... 267
Selecting a target ........................................... 258 Backlight adjustment ...................................... 270
Tracking overload .......................................... 258 Changing colours ........................................... 268
TCPA Limit adjustment ........................................ 83 Chart/ Map adjustment warning for ECDIS .... 266
Tgt Tote ON/ OFF button ................ See Target data Daylight / Dusk / Night.................................... 270
Tick intervals .......................... See Ownship settings Same as radar tick boxes............................... 269
Time ................................................... See UTC time Virtual keyboard ................................................... 22
Time Marks ON/OFF button ....................See Vector Virus protection ...................................................... 6
Time Validity................................ See Chart settings VRM ...............................................See VRM & EBL
Time Varying Objects .................. See Chart settings
Track Length .......................... See Ownship settings W
Trails
Orientaion in RM/ TM button .......................... 128 Square box on screen
Radar trails ......................................... See Radar True motion settings....................................... 136
Transceiver Wind
Ready/ Not ready ........................................... 192 Selecting True or Rel ..................................... 280
Selection in radar or ECDIS modes ....... 178, 194 True & Rel ...................................................... 280
Selection in standby............................... 178, 193 Viewing in HAP tab ........................................ 101
Trial Manoeuvre ................................................. 261
True Z
Electronic bearing line ................................... 275
Maps .................................................... See Maps Zone display ON/ OFF........................................ 146
Motion ............................................................ 127 Zoom
True motion ............................ See Ownship settings Chart zoom in & out ............................. See Scale
Tune indicator ......................................... See Radar Manually zooming IN........................................ 61
Two Depth Shades...................... See Chart settings
Page 406 of 406

Mantadigital: Operators Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mantadigital: Operators Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 1: <Contents

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

Issue 1 October 2011 Page 1 of 406

Equipment IMO Regulations Standards

Amendment Equipment Mod

© Copyright Kelvin Hughes Limited 2011.

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

2 Safety notices and warnings

2.1 Electrical warnings

WARNING: ELECTRICAL HAZARD

WARNING: MAINS VOLATGES

Caution: Mains voltages

2.2 General warning notices

WARNING: This equipment contains material which produces toxic fumes

WARNING: Navigation systems and equipment supplied by Kelvin

2.3 Equipment servicing

Caution: This equipment must only be serviced by Kelvin Hughes

Unauthorised servicing invalidates the warranty status of the unit.

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

2.4 Radar radiation hazards

WARNING: NON-IONISING RADIATION HAZARD

Avoid exposure to the main beam of a radar antenna.

It is accepted in most countries that no significant hazard is presented by

Users of cardiac pacemakers should be aware of the possibility that radio

2.5 Anti Static handling

Caution: Anti Static handling

Persons removing sub-units from equipment containing these

Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low

Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static

Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must

Fit new devices in a special handling area.

For detailed information, refer to IEC Standard IEC 61340-5-

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

2.6 Software licensing and virus protection

2.6.1 Approved software

2.6.2 Kelvin Hughes software copyright

2.6.3 Microsoft Windows© copyright

2.6.4 Virus precautions

Removable media referred to includes but is not restricted to:

 USB flash memory.

WARNING: Repairs to systems found to be infected with a virus are

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

2.7 General health & safety

2.7.1 Health and safety policies

2.7.2 Risk assessment

2.7.3 Electrical safety

2.7.4 Working at heights

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

Function not available in Radar modes ECDIS mode only

Bookmarks can be enabled in

If this is not open, press Ctrl + F and

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

3.2 System Overview

HAP and ECDIS NOT enabled HAP and ECDIS enabled

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

3.3 Display modes

3.3.1 Single radar display

3.3.2 Dual radar display

3.3.3 Chart radar

MantaDigital operators handbook HBK-4001, issue 1 October 2011

3.3.4 Harbour & Pilotage mode (HAP)

3.3.5 ECDIS mode